Video Product

DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E
DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E
DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
No. D17-6616,6626 Digital Video Camera PAL/iPAL
D17-6633,6634
D17-6636,6637

Canon Inc.
Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
c CANON INC. 2002 First Edition : Mar. 2002
First Print : Mar. 2002
 CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CONTENTS
1. Product Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-1 Concepts -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-2 Product Features ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-3 Product Specifications Comparison Chart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
1-4 Function and Performance Comparison Chart ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-3
2. Technical Explanation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-8
2-1 Design ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
2-1-1 Design Concept ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
2-2 New Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
2-2-1 Night Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
2-2-2 Analog/Digital Signal Conversion (AV input → DV Output) ------------------------------------------------------ 1-10
2-2-3 USB Transfer Function for Images Recorded on a Card (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E Models) --------- 1-11
3. Performance / Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13
4. System Charts --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-22
5. Overview of Viewfinder / LCD Panel Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-23
5-1 Camera Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-23
5-2 VCR Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-29
5-3 Card Recording Mode (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) --------------------------------------------------------------- 1-33
5-4 Card Playback Mode (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-35
5-5 Bitmap Display ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-37
5-6 Menu Display ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-39
5-7 Card-Related Screen Displays (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) ------------------------------------------------------ 1-46
5-8 Warning Displays -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-53
6. Backing Up Various Data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55
6-1 Backup by Main Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55
6-2 Backup by Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Lithium Button Primary Battery) ---------------------------- 1-55
6-3 Backup Conditions Related to Switching Actions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-56
6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-56
6-3-2 Switching the Power Switch to a Different Position ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-57
6-3-3 Switching Camera Modes/Switching Program AE Modes ---------------------------------------------------------- 1-58
7. Other Features -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-59
7-1 Green Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-59
7-2 On Screen ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-59
7-3 Headphones and Speaker ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-60
7-4 Battery Indicator, Low-Power Warning, and Low-Power Shutoff ------------------------------------------------------------- 1-60
7-5 System Data Displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-60
7-6 Data Code Display ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-60
7-7 MP Tape Support --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-60
7-8 Confirmation Beep ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-61
7-9 Using Analog Line Recording and DV Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-61
7-10 Support for Analog Signal I/O Copyright Protection Signals ---------------------------------------------------------------- 1-62
7-11 Video ID1 Detection/Output Support -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-62
7-12 Closed Caption Detection and Output ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-62
7-13 Audio Dubbing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
7-13-1 Tapes to which Audio Dubbing can be Added ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
7-13-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-63
7-13-3 Audio Dubbing Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
7-13-4 CGMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-63
7-14 AV Insert (Not Available on PAL Models) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-64
7-14-1 Tapes that can be Used with AV Insert Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-64
7-14-2 AV Insert Signal Input Source Selection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-64
7-14-3 AV Insert Procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-64
7-14-4 CGMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-64
7-15 Analog/Digital Signal Conversion (Does not Apply to PAL Models) ------------------------------------------------------- 1-65
7-15-1 A/D Signal Conversion Procedure ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-65
7-15-2 CGMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-65
7-16 Multi-Dial ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-65
7-17 LCD Panel/CVF (Color Viewfinder) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-66
7-17-1 Camera Mode and Card/Camera Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-66
7-17-2 VCR Mode and Card Playback Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-66
7-18 Memory Card System (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) -------------------------------------------------------------- 1-67
7-18-1 Card Recording (Recording Still Images onto a Card) ------------------------------------------------------------- 1-67
7-18-2 Copying ([ ]/[ ]) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-68
7-18-3 Card Mix ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-69
7-18-4 Card Playback ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-69
7-18-5 Image Protection Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-70
7-18-6 Print Mark Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-70
7-18-7 Erasing Images ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-70
7-18-8 Formatting Cards -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
7-18-9 Card Review -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
7-18-10 Image Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-71
7-18-11 Card Playback Feeding Jump ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-72
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1. Product Overview

1-1 Concepts

High Performance
Compact & Stylist Camcorder
The DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
is more stylish than the DM-MV450 E, DM-MV450i E, DM-MV430 E, DM-MV430i E,
DM-MV400E, DM-MV400i E, DM-MV410 E and has more advanced features, providing an
even more attractive product.

◆ Even more compact and stylish.

◆ High performance lens distinguishes the DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-
MV500 E, DM-MV490 E from competing products.
◆ All-in-One and improved PC interface.
◆ Even more user-friendly and fun to use.

1-2 Product Features

(1) Compact & Stylish
● More comfortable to hold
● Advanced, stylish design

(2) High Performance

● 1/6-inch CCD Total pixels : Approx. 460,000 Effectrive pixels : Approx. 290,000
● 22× magnification zoom lens (DM-MV550i E only ; DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E and DM-
MV490 E are 18×)

(3) All In One

● 2.5-inch LCD Monitor : Approx. 112,000 pixels
● 3× speed recording function (SDL) compatible (DM-MV550i E)
● Advanced accessory shoe (DM-MV550i E)

(4) Multi Media

● SD memory card/ MultiMedia card compatible (DM-MV550i E and DM-MV530i E)
● USB port (DM-MV550i E and DM-MV530i E)

(5) New User I/F

● Bit Map Display
Bitmap display makes it possible to express a variety of rich characters.
(For characters, refer to 5-5 “Bit Map Display”.)
● Advanced illumination keys (DM-MV550i E)
Six color variations (cyan, blue, green, yellow, purple, orange (new)) can be provided using three RGB LED elements.

1-1
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-3 Product Specifications Comparison Chart

DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E
Specifications DM-MV550i E DM-MV530i E
DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
Zoom mag. (tape) 22× optical zoom/
18× optical zoom/360× digital zoom
440× digital zoom
(card) 22× optical zoom/
18× optical zoom/72× digital zoom (DM-MV530i E only)
88× digital zoom
CCD 1/6-inch interlaced CCD (total pixels : 540,000)
Image stabilization Electronic image stabilizer (effective pixels: 340,000)
LCD monitor 2.5-inch screen, 112,000 pixels
EVF 0.44-inch screen, 113,000-pixel color viewfinder
2×/3× SP recording
● × ×
function (SDL)
Analog line input ● ● ●*
Memory card function ● ● ×
Still images Progressive Photo Progressive Photo
Clear still
(card only) (card only)
Illuminated keys ★ (6 colors) × ×
Multi-image screen ● ● ×
Night mode ★ ★ ★
Battery charging system ● ● ●
USB compatibility ★ (Storage class) ★ (Storage class) ×
Analog/DV signal
★ ★ ★*
conversion
Bitmap display ★ ★ ★
Accessory shoe ● (Compatible with
● ●
advanced accessory shoe)

★ : New function ● : Included × : Not included

* : Not applicable to PAL models

1-2
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1-4 Function and Performance Comparison Chart

DM-MV450i E, DM-MV430i E, DM-MV400i E, DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E

Item DM-MV450 E, DM-MV430 E, DM-MV400 E DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E
DM-MV410 E DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
Camera
Image sensing Image size 1/4-inch CCD 1/6-inch CCD
device Pixels Total pixels : 540,000 ←
Effective pixels : 340,000
System Interlacing ←
Filter Color correction filter ←
Lens Optical zoom 10× 22× (DM-MV550i E),
magnification 18× (DM-MV530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E)
Digital zoom magnification 40× (10×4) 88×/440×* (DM-MV550i E),
72×/360×* (DM-MV530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E)
(*: Except during card recording)
Focal length 4.2-42 mm 2.8-61.6 mm (DM-MV550i E),
2.8-50.4 mm (DM-MV530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E)
(35 mm equivalent) 48-480 mm 48-1056 mm (DM-MV550i E),
48-864 mm (DM-MV530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E)
F-number F1.8-2.9 F1.6-3.6 (DM-MV550i E),
F1.6-2.9 (DM-MV530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E)
Zoom speed Variable ←
Filter diameter 30.5 mm P0.5 ←
Minimum illumination 2 lx (Low Light mode) 0.5 lx (Night mode)
(DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E)
2.5 lx (Low Light mode)
(DM-MV400i E, 410 E, 400 E)
Image stabilization Electronic ←
Shooting functions
Program AE (Easy Recording) (Easy Recording)
(Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, (Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf &
Surf & Snow (Sand & Snow), Low Light) Snow (Sand & Snow), Low Light, Night)
Photometric Center-weighted Easy Recording mode, Auto mode, Sports Easy Recording mode, Auto mode, Sports mode,
system photometry mode, Portrait mode, Low Light mode Portrait mode, Low Light mode, Night mode
Evaluative photometry 64 segments (Spotlight mode, ←
Surf & Snow mode (Sand & Snow mode))
Exposure AE lock × ←
adjustment Exposure correction ● (after AE shift) ←
AE shift ● ←
Gain setting/sensitivity increase × ←
Back light correction × ←
Shutter speed High-speed shutter 8 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, ←
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/8000 second)
Slow shutter 1/12.5 second (Low Light AE mode) Night AE mode : multiple levels (1/2-1/25 second)
Low Light AE mode : 1/12.5 second
Aperture value Auto-iris ←
Image quality Color gain adjustment × ←
adjustment Hue adjustment × ←
Sharpness adjustment × ←
Setup adjustment × ←

1-3
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

DM-MV450i E, DM-MV430i E, DM-MV400i E, DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E

Item DM-MV450 E, DM-MV430 E, DM-MV400 E DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E
DM-MV410 E DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
Shooting functions
WB Auto ● ←
Set ● (1) ←
Preset Outdoor, indoor ←
Systems TTL, 64 segments ←
Focus Mode AF/MF ←
Manual focus Multi-dial operation ←
16:9 Recording system Vertical stretching ←
Area marker display × ←
Shooting D. effects Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic ←
effects D. fade White (black) auto, wipe (horizontal), wipe (vertical) ←
Multi-image screen 4/9/16-image screen (DM-MV450i E, 450 E) ← (DM-MV550i E, 530i E)
Zebra pattern × ←
Color bar × ←
Motion video Recorded video Field image (interlaced scan) ←
shooting Self-timer 10 sec./remote control : 2 sec. ←
Interval timer × ←
Clear scan × ←
Still image Recorded video Field image ←
shooting (tape) Recording time 6.5 seconds 6.5 seconds
(ESP/ELP : approx. 8 seconds, DM-MV450i E, 450 E) (ESP/ELP : approx. 8 seconds, DM-MV550i E)
Frame processing Low Light mode Low Light mode, Night mode
Still image Recorded video Progressive Photo Frame image ← (DM-MV550i E, 530i E)
shooting (card) (DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E)
Recorded image size and 768(H) × 576(V)/JPEG ←(DM-MV550i E, 530i E)
file system (DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E)
Memory card SD memory card, MultiMediaCard ←
REC Search ● ←
REC Review ● ←
Card Review × ★ (DM-MV550i E, 530i E)
Standby switch × ←
Power save Power shutoff ←
(after five minutes in Recording Pause)
Displayed text recording × ←
Audio 16-bit 2-channel (48 KHz) ←
12-bit 4-channel (32 KHz)
Simultaneous 4-channel recording in capable
Wind screen ● ON/OFF switch (built-in microphone only) ←
EVF Size 0.44-inch (TFT color) ←
Pixels 113,000 ←
Brightness adjustment × ←
Color adjustment × ←
Movable × ←
Monitor LCD Size 2.5-inch ←
Pixels 112,000 ←
Brightness adjustment ● ←
Movable ● Supports mirror shooting ←

1-4
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

DM-MV450i E, DM-MV430i E, DM-MV400i E, DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E

Item DM-MV450 E, DM-MV430 E, DM-MV400 E DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E
DM-MV410 E DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
VCR
Playback Frame playback Forward/Reverse ←
system Slow playback Forward/Reverse ←
2× SP playback Forward/Reverse ←
1× SP playback Forward/Reverse ←
Cue/review 11.5× speed ←
Search Photo search ● ←
Date search ● ←
Index search × ←
Playback D. effects Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic ←
effects D. fade White (black) auto, wipe (horizontal), Scroll, Mosaic ←
Multi-image screen 4/9/16-image screen (DM-MV450i E, 450 E) ← (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
Data code display Time and date display, camera information ←
Card review × ★ (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
Card slideshow ● (DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E only) ← (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
Card playback feeding jump × ★ (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
Audio dubbing ● ←
AV Insert Digital ● (microphone only on PAL models) ←
Analog ● (Not applicable to PAL models) ←
Zero Set Memory ● (Not applicable to PAL models) ←
Editing Quick editing × ←
functions Computerized effects × ←
System
Interface Microphone input ● ←
(terminal) Headphone output ● (also serves as AV terminal) ←
DV terminal ● (I/O ; output only for PAL models) ←
(complies with IEEE1394)
S terminal ● (I/O ; output only for PAL models) ←
AV terminal I/O, φ 3.5 mm jack ←
(also serves as headphone terminal ;
output only for PAl models)
USB port (mini-B) × ★ (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
Memory card file transfer × ★ (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
DV to Analog signal conversion × ★ (Not applicable to PAL models)
Editing support LANC terminal ←
World clock ● ←
Text titles × ←
Speaker ● ←
Confirmation beep ● ←
Tally light × ←
Remote control Supports 1 and 2 ←
Accessory shoe ● (DM-MV450i E, 450 E only ; ● (DM-MV550i E only ;
supports advanced accessory shoe) supports advanced accessory shoe)
Video ID ● (ID1: NTSC only) ←
Recording SP/LP ● ←
modes SDL ( E SP/ E LP) ● (DM-MV450i E, 450 E only) ← (DM-MV550i E only)
Illuminated keys ● (3 colors : DM-MV450i E, 450 E only) ★ (6 colors: DM-MV550i E only)

1-5
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

DM-MV450i E, DM-MV430i E, DM-MV400i E, DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E

Item DM-MV450 E, DM-MV430 E, DM-MV400 E DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E
DM-MV410 E DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
System
Custom keys × ←
Index Screen key ● (DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E only) ← (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
Mix key ● (DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E only) ← (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
Slideshow key ● (DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E only) ← (DM-MV550i E, 530i E only)
DV control × ←
Internal battery charging ● ←
Backup power Lithium button battery (CR2025) ←
Battery pack power 500 Series lithium battery ←

★ : New function (compared with DM-MV450 i E, 430i E, 400i E, 450 E, 430 E, 410 E, 400 E)

1-6
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

External View

Fig. 1-1

1-7
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2. Technical Explanation

2-1 Design

2-1-1 Design Concept

“New Generation = New Image”

(1) “Spiral” style
● A spiral motif is used, continuing from the barrel to the body exterior to the sides of the barrel.
● Styling distinguishes the DM-MV550i E, 530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E as a new generation which has evolved from the
more-orthodox DM-MV450i E, 430i E, 400i E, 450 E, 430 E, 410 E, 400 E.

440x
DIGITAL ZOOM

– REC REC + FOCUS AE SHIFT

SEARCH SEARCH SUDE SHOW

OPEN
MultiMediaCard

CARD

PUSH

Fig. 1-2

(2) Color variation

● Different colors are used on the body sides and on the rear end (F jack cover, RB cover, and rear cover). Colors are varied
according to the model specs (DM-MV550i E, 530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E).
(3) Comfortable operation
● The DM-MV550i E, 530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E is designed to allow operation while viewing the LCD, with the card-
system operations assigned to illuminated keys.

440x
DIGITAL ZOOM

– REC REC + FOCUS AE SHIFT

SEARCH SEARCH SUDE SHOW

OPEN
MIX DATA
CODE P
MultiMediaCard

DIGITAL ON/OFF MENU

EFFECTS CARD

PUSH

Fig. 1-3

1-8
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-2 New Functions

2-2-1 Night Mode

Canon video cameras have a Low Light mode for Program AE for use in shooting under low-light conditions. However, in the DM-
MV450i E, 430i E, 450 E, 430 E, the minimum brightness for shooting in Low Light mode is approx. 2 lx (shutter speed of approx. 1/
30 second), so these models require an extra light source (such as a video light) for shooting subjects darker than 2 lx.

In order to enable shooting under darker conditions, Sony added “Night Shot” mode, which is designed to utilize the CCD’s high
sensitivity to infrared light. This mode normally involves removing the infrared cut filter, which is attached in front of the CCD, in order
to match the CCD’s sensitivity to visibility characteristics. Now, Sony is using “Super Night Shot” mode, which uses infrared light for
illumination. However, systems which involve the removal of the infrared cut filter are disadvantageous in that the colors of the image
being shot are not expressed correctly.

JVC added “Night Eye” mode, which reduces the shutter speed instead of removing the infrared cut filter. This approach emphasizes the
ability to shoot subjects in color with good illumination, even in locations where it is undesirable to use a video light.

The Night mode used in the D66 is like JVC’s approach in that the shutter speed is reduced without removing the infrared cut filter. It
should be noted that reducing the shutter speed causes movement resolution to decline, so a system for giving priority to movement
resolution by AGC control is used to enable subjects to be shot in color with good illumination.

System Slow shutter system Infrared cut filter system

Slow shutter plus gain increase Removal and insertion of infrared Removal and insertion of infrared cut filter only
cut filter and use of infrared lighting
Manufacturer • DM-MV550i E, 530i E, • SONY • SHARP (Night Radar; MX1, MR1, etc.)
500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E (Super Night Shot; TRV30, PC120, etc.) • Panasonic (old overseas models)
(Night mode)
• JVC (Night eye; DVP3)
• Panasonic
(latest overseas models)
AE control Controlled by shutter/AGC Controlled by AGC No control
(even bright subjects are controlled) (bright subjects not controlled)
Advantages Color reproducibility : ● Movement resolution : Maintained
No cost increase
Disadvantages Movement resolution : Reduced Color reproducibility : × (no colors)
Mechanical mechanism required (higher cost)

1-9
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-2-2 Analog/Digital Signal Conversion (AV input → DV Output)

With older models, in order to transfer recorded images from 8 mm tape or VHS tape to a PC, it was necessary to first record the data
onto DV tape, then connect a digital video camera to the PC using a DV cable, and then play the DV tape.

(1) The 8 mm/VHS tape is played and recorded onto DV tape.

Recorder to DV tape
Playback of analog tape

(2) The digital video camera is connected to the IEEE1394 port on the PC using a DV cable (CV-150F or CV-250F) and the DV tape
is played.

DV cable
(CV-150F or CV-250F)
Playback of DV tape

Image transfer

The A/D signal conversion function in the D66 enables real-time conversion of analog signals input to the AV terminal into digital
signals (DV signals) and outputs them through the DV terminal. This means that images recorded on an 8 mm tape or VHS tape can
be easily transferred to a PC, without first recording the video onto a DV tape.

DV cable
(CV150F or CV-250F)
Playback of Analog tape Analog/DV conversion

Image transfer

Summary of operations in VCR (Tape), Stop mode

AV input → DV OFF
AV input → DV ON DV input No DV input
(mode used with older products) (mode used with older products)
AV terminal, S-Video terminal Input mode Output mode Output mode
DV terminal Output mode Input mode —
OSD display AV input R DV DV input —
Panel display Analog input screen DV input screen Blue background

1-10
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

2-2-3 USB Transfer Function for Images Recorded on a Card (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E Models)
With older models, in order to transfer still images from an SD memory card or MultiMedia card (referred to below under the general
term “memory card” unless further clarification is necessary) to a PC, it was necessary to remove the memory card from the video
camera, then load the memory card in a card reader or PC card adapter connected to the PC.

PC card adapter

To card slot

SD memory card/
MultiMedia card

To USB port
Card reader

The D66 has a file transfer function that simplifies this process. When the USB port (mini-B) on the D66 is connected with the USB port
on a PC using the included interface cable (IFC-300PCU), image data recorded on the memory card can be read and written using
software on the PC. If the “ZoomBrowser” program (for Windows) or “ImageBrowser” program (for Macintosh) in the included Digital
Video Solution Disk is installed on the PC in advance, you can transfer the desired images to the PC while viewing reduced image of the
still images recorded on the memory card.

Data transfer

Interface cable
IFC-300PCU

1-11
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Basic Specifications
• Interface : Conforming to USB Standard Rev. 1.1
• Compatible media : SD memory card, multimedia card
• USB device class : Conforming to Mass Storage Class 1.0
• Compatible OS : Windows 98, 98SE, ME, 2000, (XP) / Mac OS 8.6 - X

Transition to and Return from “Personal Computer Connection Mode”

Transition to : When USB connection is made to the PC in the “Card Play Mode”, the “Personal Computer Connection Mode” is
selected through automatic recognition.
Return from : When the main power supply connection is changed over in the “Personal Computer Connection Mode” or USB
connection is separated fromm the PC, the normal mode is set up again.

* Before returning from the “Personal Computer Connection Mode”, be sure to stop the drive on the PC side.

“Personal Connection Mode”

• When the “Personal Computer Connection Mode” is selected, recognition as a removable disk is made on the Explorer (Win-
dows) to allow the reading/writing of image files in the card.
• Using the Zoom Browser EX (Windows) / Image Browser (Macintosh) camera window, it is possible to read/write image files.

Main Unit Operations in “Personal Computer Connection Mode”

• Any operations other than a power supply connection changeover are inhibited (key control nullified), and an indication of USB
connection is given on the panel.
• The card access LED indicator blinks during the reading/writing of an image file in the card.

1-12
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

3. Performance / Functions
DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
1 Type Video camcorder
2 Recording system Rotary 2-head helical scan azimuth recording.
Personal digital DVC (SD standard/SDL *).
Conforms to the NTSC system (625 lines × 50 fields).
(* : Only in the DM-MV550i E, three heads are equipped for SDL implementation.)
2-1 Video signal recording system Digital component recording.
SD specifications. SDL specifications. (DM-MV550i E only)
Sampling frequency Y = 13.5MHz Y = 10.125MHz
R-Y, B-Y = 6.75MHz R-Y, B-Y = 6.75MHz
Number of quantified bits 8bits 8bits
2-2 Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording. PCM digital recording.
16-bit, 48KHz 2 channels ---
12-bit, 32KHz 2 channels 32KHz 2 channels
(Stereo 1, 2) (Stereo 1)
2-3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot type 2-frequency pilot type
2-4 Tape speed Approx. 18.83mm/sec. (SP mode) Approx. 9.42mm/sec. (ESP mode)
Approx. 12.57mm/sec. (LP mode) Approx. 6.29mm/sec. (ELP mode)
2-5 Head drum
Drum diameter φ 21.7mm φ 21.7mm
Speed 9000/ rpm 9000/ rpm
Number of heads 2 video heads 3 video heads
3 Record/play times Max. 80 min. (SP mode) Max. 160 min. (ESP mode)
Max. 120 min. (LP mode) Max. 240 min. (ELP mode)
Continuous recording time
DM-MV550i E BP-508* -----
BP-511/BP-512 Approx. 165 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 135 minutes (using LCD)
BP-522 Approx. 350 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 280 minutes (using LCD)
BP-535 Approx. 555 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 445 minutes (using LCD)
DM-MV530i E BP-508* Approx. 90 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 75 minutes (using LCD)
BP-511/BP-512 Approx. 165 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 135 minutes (using LCD)
BP-522 Approx. 350 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 285 minutes (using LCD)
BP-535 Approx. 555 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 460 minutes (using LCD)
DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
BP-508* Approx. 95 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 75 minutes (using LCD)
BP-511/BP-512 Approx. 175 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 140 minutes (using LCD)
BP-522 Approx. 370 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 295 minutes (using LCD)
BP-535 Approx. 590 minutes (using CVF), Approx. 470 minutes (using LCD)
* : BP-508 applies only to sale overseas
4 Usable video cassettes Mini-DVC specifications.
4-1 Tape type Evaporated metal tape.
4-2 Tape width 6.35mm Evaporated metal tape.
4-3 Tape thickness 7µm

1-13
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5 Camera
5-1 Video element 1/6-inch interlace CCD.
5-1-1Number of pixels Total number of pixels: approx. 540,000
Effective number of pixels: approx. 340,000
5-1-2 Filters Complementary color filter
5-1-3 Color separation system Differential read-out type.
5-1-4 Signal configuration PAL standard color video signal
5-1-5 Scan system 625 lines x 50 fields / 25 frames
5-1-6 Minimum subject illumination
(Night mode) Approx. 0.5 lx
(Auto mode) Approx. 10 lx
5-1-7 Subject illumination range Approx. 0.5 lx to approx. 100,000 lx
5-2 Photo lens DM-MV550i E DM-MV530i E, 500i E, 510 E, 500 E, 490 E
(22× optical lens attached) (18× optical lens attached)
5-2-1 Nominal focal length 2.8 to 61.6 mm 2.8 to 50.4 mm
Optical zoom Electronic zoom Optical zoom Electronic zoom
Zoom ratio 22× 88× (22×4 = 88), 18× 72× (18×4 = 72),
440×* (22´20 = 440) 360×* (18×20 = 360)
(35 mm film-equivalent) 48mm to 1,056mm 4,224 mm equivalent 48mm to 864mm 3,456 mm equivalent
21,120 mm* equivalent 17,280 mm* equivalent
* : Except during card recording * : Except during card recording (DM-MV530i E only)
5-2-2 Nominal aperture ratio 1:1.6 (F3.6 on tele end) 1:1.6 (F2.9 on tele end)
5-2-3 Lens configuration 11 elements in 8 groups, 11 elements in 8 groups,
using one two-sided aspheric lens using one two-sided aspheric lens
5-2-4 Focus adjustment Inner focus type, manually adjustable (adjusted by rotating multi-dial)
5-2-5 Minimum object distance 10 mm (AF linked; wide end), 1 m for full zoom area (from lens tip)
5-2-6 Power zoom Multi-level variable-speed power zoom, slide lever system. The zoom speed can be changed
depending on the shift amount of the slide lever.
Using optical zoom Approx. 4 seconds to approx. 39 seconds Approx. 3.5 seconds to approx. 39 seconds
Using electronic zoom Approx. 6 seconds to approx. 44 seconds Approx. 5.5 seconds to approx. 44 seconds
Manual zooming cannot be used (no zoom ring)
5-2-7 Focal length display None. There is a simple zoom display in the viewfinder.
5-2-8 Macro mechanism Wide end macro
5-2-9 Macro shooting distance 10 mm (from lens front)
5-2-10 Filter diameter 30.5 mm P0.5
5-2-11 Accessory lens, filter WD-30.5, TL-30.5, or FS-30.5U may be used
Note that when TL-30.5 is attached, image quality may decline (image blurring) at the edges of
the screen on the tele end.
5-2-12 Lens hood None
5-2-13 Lens cap Included; cover-on type
5-3 Hand jitter compensation (Image stabilizer)
5-3-1 Type Electronic.
5-3-2 Hand jitter detection Angular velosity detecting method (with an piezo-electic vibration sensor).
5-4 Recording modes Movie mode and photo mode
(Tape and card recording)
*Card recording is available only in the DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E : Progressive photo.
5-4-1 Movie mode Normal recording (Interlace scan)
5-4-2 Photo mode Still picture recording for approx. 6.5 seconds (approx. 8 seconds in the ESP/ELP mode : only in
the DM-MV550i E) (Frame recording, Field recording at the time of card image mixing in the
movie mode)
When the Photo button is half-pressed and locked, a display ( : lights green when the AF lock
is applied) appears in the viewfinder.
5-4-3 Card recording DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
When the Photo button is operated in Card Recording mode, Progressive Photo images can be
saved as still images onto a MultiMedia card or SD (Secure Digital) memory card.

1-14
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-5 Exposure control

5-5-1 AE function
Program AE Full auto mode, auto mode, sports mode, portrait mode, spotlight mode,
surf (sand) & snow mode, low light mode, night mode.
5-5-2 Light metering system Center-weighted metering : Easy Recording mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low
Light mode, Night mode
Whole area average photometry + 64-segment evaluative photometry :
Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow mode
Frame division 64 sectors (8 horizontal × 8 vertical)
5-5-3 Exposure compensation function
AE shift AE shift is performed by pressing the AE Shift button. After AE shift, AE level compensation
can be made using the multi dial (except for the full auto mode).
Amount of shift ±7 steps (-2.0, -1.5, -1.25, -1.0, -0.75, -0.5, -0.25, ±0, +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, +1.0, +1.25, +1.5 +2.0)
A numeric value (AE ±0) is indicated on the finder screen.
5-5-4 Electronic shutter
High-speed shutter Auto mode : 1/50 sec., 1/120 sec., 1/250 sec., 1/500 sec., 1/1000 sec., 1/2000 sec., 1/4000 sec.,
1/8000 sec. (Auto mode)
Up to 1/250 sec. in the card mode (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
With Image stabilizer turned ON : 1/100 sec. --- Upon detection of a flicker
1/120 sec. --- No flicker detected
With Image stabilizer turned OFF : 1/50 sec. --- Upon detection of a flicker
Low-speed shutter In Low Light mode: 1/12.5 second (constant speed)
In Night mode: 1/2 second to 1/25 second (variable speed)
(linking range in Night mode: 1/2 second to 1/500 second)

5-6 Autofocus (AF)

5-6-1 System TTL, video signal detection auto focus type AF.
5-6-2 AF measurement area Center of screen
5-6-3 Metering frame display None.
5-6-4 AF operational range 10mm - infinity (Wide); 1m - infinity (from front of lens) throughout the entire zoom range.
5-6-5 AF operational brightness range 50 lux - 100,000 lux
5-6-6 AF mode selection Continuous AF/manual focusing. AF can be turned on and off by pressing the focus button in all
modes except full auto. (Pressing focus button)
Manual focus is displayed in the viewfinder during manual focus (AF OFF).
5-7 Viewfinder 0.44-inch type, color liquid crystal display (approx. 113,000 pixels), telescoping type (pull out).
ON with the LCD monitor retracted (with the panel face on the body side) and in the mirror mode
5-7-1 Rotation Possible (70 degrees upward: For low-angle shooting)
5-7-2 Eyepiece removal Yes.
5-7-3 Diopter adjustment range +1.0 to –5.0 diopters (eyepiece).
5-7-4 Lens configuration 1 groups, 1 elements.

1-15
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-8 LCD panel 2.5-inch type, color liquid crystals, display approx. 112,000 pixels (234 (V) × 480 (H)). TFT
active matrix drive.
RGB delta array. On except when the LCD monitor is stored (body side panel face).
5-8-1 Angle adjustment Yes. High angle, low angle, monitoring during mirror mode.
5-8-2 Data display Operation mode display, simple zoom position display, battery level display, remaining tape
display, time code, various warning. Color display. No display during mirror mode.
Relationships to the viewfinder (EVF)

Camera Mode/Card Record Mode*1 VCR Mode/Card Play Mode*1

LCD Panel Position LCD Panel CVF LCD Panel CVF
Panel Stored (Body side panel face) OFF ON OFF ON
Panel Stored (Outside panel face) ON OFF ON OFF
Panel Open ON OFF ON OFF
Mirror mode*3 ON*2 ON ON OFF
*1 : DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only
*2 : Appears in Mirror mode with menu operation.
*3 : In the mirror mode, limitations are imposed on panel display, i.e., only the following indications can be given.
(Normal display on the view finder screen)
Camera mode : Recording , Recording pause , Ejection
Card recording mode : Without card , With card, accessing <<<<,

Self-timer indication: (Blinking while the self-timer is active)

(Mirror mode is temporarily turned off during REC search and when a warning is displayed.)

5-9 White balance adjustment TTL, 64-sector, new white extraction type FAWB.
With set/preset (outdoors: 5,600K; indoors: 3,200K) (selection from camera menu).
Adjustment range 2,800K - 8,000K.
5-10 Digital feature play function Fader, effects, multi-screen (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only), card mix (DM-MV550i E,
DM-MV530i E only) modes are provided.
Fader : Coupled to the start/stop button (VCR mode button), one-time execution is pos-
sible when the fader mode is displayed (the mode display disappears when the
fader ends).
Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned off.
Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as
indicated manually. Displays continue until turned off.
Card mix : A mixture of sample images on the included MMC-8M, images recorded to a
card, and camera motion video is displayed.
5-10-1 Fader (tape recording only) Audio-synchronized fader.
Auto fade (JAPAN models: White Fade; Overseas Models: Black Fade),
Wipe (Left/Right), Wipe (Top/Under)
Fade time Approx. 4 sec.
5-10-2 Effects Art, Monochrome, Sepia, Mosaic. (there is no Mosaic during card recording)
Operated by pressing the Effects button to toggle this function ON and OFF.
5-10-3 Multi-screen (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only; excludes Night mode)
Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode Manual, fast (every 4 frames), normal (every 6 frames), slow (every 8 frames).
In low-light mode : fast (every 4 frames), normal (every 8 frames), slow (every 12 frames)
5-10-4 Card mix (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Mix type Card chroma key, Card luminance key, Camera chroma key
Mix level adjustment 32 steps.
5-10-5 Applicability in operation modes

Card recording
Tape recording
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Fader ○ ×
Effects ○ ○
Multi-Image Screen (ZDM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) ○ ○
Card Mix (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) ○ ×

1-16
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-11 Built-in microphone Stereo (electret condenser microphone used).

Stereo using on-directional microphone × 2 + electrical circuit.
5-11-1 Wind cut function Yes. With on/off switch (menu selection for built-in microphone only).
5-12 Additional functions
5-12-1 Time code Recording time (0:00:00 - 7:59:59) is displayed and recorded in the sub code area.
5-12-2 Data code There is no recording time display, but the recording date/time and camera data are recorded and
can be displayed during play.
Date/time Coupling range: January 1, 2002 to December 31, 2030 (initial setting: January 1, 2002).
World time capability. Automatic setting to the date/time of travel destinations by selecting the
destination city. During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time
and date, or time only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990 through December
31, 2089.)
Camera data Shutter speed and F-number information are recorded (but not displayed during recording), and
can be displayed during playback.
5-12-3 Assessory shoe Provided. The DM-MV550i E supports the Advanced Accessory Shoe function.
5-12-4 Image search function Tape can be played (forward/reverse) during camera recording pause by operating the Rec Search
button. (The camera returns to recording pause when recording search is canceled.)
5-12-5 Rec review function Started by operating the Rec Check button ( ) during camera recording pause.
5-12-6 Zero set memory Yes. Tape can be forwarded or rewound continuously until the zero set memory key of the WL-
D77/WL-D74 is operated (The counter value is set to 0:00:00.) (Zero set is possible only during
recording, not during play.)
5-12-7 Remote control ON/OFF Yes. Available in both the camera recording and the VCR modes (menu selection).
Approx. 2 seconds in WL-D77/WL-D74 operation
5-12-8 Headphone volume adjustment Adjustment is possible using the multi-dial.
6 Recorder unit
6-1 Recording functions Camera recording, DV input recording *, analog input recording *. (* : iPAL models only)
6-1-1 Recording format Personal DVC (SD specifications/SDL specifications *). (* : DM-MV550i E only)
6-1-2 Tape speed
SD specifications Approx. 18.81mm/sec. (SP mode), Approx. 12.56mm/sec. (LP mode)
SDL specifications * Approx. 9.41mm/sec. (ESP mode), Approx. 6.28mm/sec. (ELP mode) (* : DM-MV550i E only)
6-1-3 DV input recording Conforms to IEEE 1394.
Records video and audio signals from a digital video camera connected with the DV cable.
6-1-4 Analog input recording The S-video jack and AV jack are used to recordanalog video and audio signals. (iPAL models
only)
6-1-5 Terminal priority during recording DV jack > S-video jack > AV jack (iPAL models only)
6-2 Insert recording Imposible. (iPAL models only)
6-2-1 Insertable tape Only tapes with SP recording can be inserted.
6-3 Audio-Dubbing Imposible. (SD tape only)
6-3-1 Tapes usable Only tapes with 12-bit SP recording other than for audio dubbing 4-channel simultaneous re-
cordings can be used for dubbing.
6-3-2 Audio-dubbing signal input Line (AV mini-jack) or microphone (external/internal) audio signals.
6-3-3 Audio-dubbing selection Operate the audio-dubbing button of the remote control in play pause status.
6-4 Play functions Standard play and special play
6-4-1 Standard playback
a. Video Video recorded in the SP, LP mode or ESP*, ELP* mode. (* : DM-MV550i E Only)
b. Audio 16-bit Sampling frequency 48KHz, 44.1KHz, 32KHz. (except for SDL specifications)
12-bit Sampling frequency 32KHz.
Playback using stereo 1, stereo 2 or a mix of stereo 1 and 2 (variable mix ratio).
6-4-2 Special playback Video only play
a. Still picture play back Movie picture : pure frame play
b. Fast forward playback Approx. 11.5× speed.
c. Rewind playback Approx. 11.5× speed.
d. Frame forward playback Forward/reverse
e. Slow playback Forward/reverse 1/3× speed
f. 1× speed playback Forward/reverse
g. 2× speed playback Forward/reverse 2× speed
h. Edit search Forward/reverse
6-5 Tape fast forward/rewind time Approx. 2 min. 20 sec. (using 60-minute tape)

1- 17
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-6 Input signals

6-6-1 DV jack IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol SD format signal. (iPAL models only)
6-6-2 AV jack (iPAL models only)
a. Video signal PAL standard color video signal
Output impedance 75 Ω
Output signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio signal
Signal type Stereo audio signal
Impedance 40 KΩ or more
Signal level −10dBv
6-6-3 S-video jack (iPAL models only)
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separate video signal
Impedance 75 Ω
Signal level 0.3Vp-p (color burst signal)
6-6-4 MIC jack
Impedance 5 KΩ or more
Signal level −57dBv (using 600 Ω microphone)
6-7 Output signals
6-7-1 DV jack IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol.
6-7-2 AV jack
a. Video signal
Signal configuration PAL standard color video signal
Output impedance 75 Ω
Output signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
Horizontal resolution
Self-rerecording Approx. 500 TV line (at screen center)
Camera EE out 500 TV line max. (at screen center)
Nominal value : 520 TV lines (at screen center)
b. Audio signal
Signal type Stereo audio signal.
Output impedance 3 KΩ or less.
Output signal level −10dBv (47KΩ load).
Frequency response 60Hz - 16KHz (1KHz standard : ±3dB)
Audio signal S/N ratio
Microphone input 48dB or more.
External microphone input 48dB or more.
6-7-3 S-video jack
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separate video signal.
Video signal 1Vp-p (Brightness + sync signal)
Color signal 0.3Vp-p (color burst signal)
Brightness signal S/N ratio 45dB or more
Horizontal ressolutin
Self-recording Approx. 500 TV line (at screen center)
Camera EE out 500 TV line max. (at screen center)
Nominal value : 520 TV lines (at screen center)
6-7-4 Headphone jack In common use as AV input/output terminal (menu selection)
Output impedance 120Ω
Output signal level −25dBv (16Ω load, at maximum volume).
6-7-5 USB port (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Supports USB 1.X.
Compatible computer systems Windows systems : IBM-compatible PC/ATs, NEC PC98-NX Series
Macintosh systems : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook
Computer operating system Windows systems : Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP
Macintosh systems : Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2

1- 18
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-8 Memory card system (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

6-8-1 Memory card used Multi-media card, SD memory card.
6-8-2 Recordable images and image qualities
Card record mode Camera images can be recorded by operating the Photo button. The digital effects function and
multi-screen function can also be used.
VCR mode Still images can be recorded by operating the Photo button (half-pressing freezes a frame and
then full-pressing records) while playing a tape. Also, DV input images can also be recorded (no
tape or tape stopped) by operating the Photo button (half-pressing freezes a frame and then full-
pressing records).
Image quality when recording from tape/DV input to a card.
Source Image recorded to card
Progressive Photo still recording
Progressive Frame images
Tape photo recording using DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E
Motion video recording Simple pure frame images
DV input Simple pure frame images

6-8-3 File system Complies with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system); supports DPOF (Digital Print Order
Format).
Image recording JPEG
Card volume level CANON_DV
DCF folder and file name //DCIM/XXXCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG XXX: folder number YYYY: file number
File numbers Files are controlled internally by folder number and file number. File numbers from 0001 to
9900 are allocated to recorded images. Up to 100 images can be saved in each folder. Numbers
from 100 - 998 are allocated to the folders.
Relationship between folder numbers and file numbers
Folder Numbers File Numbers Stored Files
100 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100 Pre-recorded sample images
101 0101 0102 0103 ････ 0199 0200
102 0201 0202 0203 ････ 0299 0300
･･･
198 9801 9802 9803 ････ 0899 9900 Photographed image recording area
200 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100
･･･
998 9801 9802 9803 ････ 9899 9900
Recorded images start from 101-0101. Basically, the numbers are allocated so that they are
larger than the directory numbers and file numbers of the files stored in the multi-media card.
6-8-4 Recorded image size 768 (H) × 576 (V)
6-8-5 Number of images recorded MMC-8M
Fine mode Approx. 43 (file size per frame, approx. 180 Kb)
Standard Approx. 78 (file size per frame, approx. 98 Kb)
Title images are pre-recorded on the included MMC-8M, so the number of images that can be
recorded is less than the numbers listed above.
The specifications for the number of recorded images are simple reference numbers; actual ca-
pacity varies significantly according to photographing conditions such as the subject and the
focal length at the time of shooting.
6-8-6 Card format The Format instruction on the menu of the body is used to format cards. Correct operation
cannot be guaranteed when a personal computer is used for formatting because formatting may
vary depending on the OS.

1-19
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-9 Digital feature play function Fader, effects, multi-screen (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) modes are provided.
Fader : Coupled to the VCR mode button, one-time execution is possible when the fader
mode is displayed (the mode display disappears when the fader ends).
Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned off.
Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as
indicated manually. Displays continue until turned off.
6-9-1 Fader Audio-synchronized fader.
Auto fade (JAPAN models: White Fade; Overseas Models: Black Fade),
Wipe (Left/Right), Wipe (Top/Under), Mosaic fade
Fade time Approx. 4 sec.
6-9-2 Effects Art, Monochrome, Sepia, Mosaic.
Operated by pressing the Effects button to toggle this function ON and OFF.
6-9-3 Multi-screen (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode Manual, fast (every 4 frames), normal (every 6 frames), slow (every 8 frames).
6-9-4 Card mix None.
6-9-5 Applicability in operation modes

Card playback (VCR/card

Playback (VCR/tape)
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only))
D. Fader ○ ×
D. Effects ○ ×
Multi-Image Screen
○ ×
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Card Mix (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) × ×

6-10 Other functions

6-10-1 Editing mechanism Used for recording pauses and stops. Also possible when the power is turned off. This function
is not effective, when the cassette is removed.
6-10-2 Automatic stop mechanism Activated if a forward still picture playback is continued for approx. five minutes, a reverse still
picture playback is continued for approx. two minutes, the dew warning is indicated, or the end/
beginning of tape is reached.
6-10-3 Automatic power off mechanism Operates when recording pause continues for approx. 5 min., and when the battery voltage drops
below the specified value.
6-10-4 Time code Automatic writing during recording. 0:00:00:00 - 7:59:59:24 (hour:minute:second:frame).
6-10-5 Photo search Used to search for photos recorded in the Photo mode.
Forward/reverse photo search (operate the , keys after selecting Photo Search with the
Search Select key of the remote control).
Setting is possible for up to ± 10 numbers from the current position.
6-10-6 Date search This function is used to specify the parts of dates that differ when recordings were made on
multiple dates.
Forward/reverse date search (operate the , keys after selecting Date Search with the
Search Select key of the remote control).
Setting is possible for up to ± 10 numbers from the current position.
6-10-7 World clock display After the reference city (the city for which the clock time has been set) has been set, the date and
time of the selected city will automatically be changed to the local date and time, and recorded
on the photo when a photo is taken.
6-10-8 Speaker Built-in. With volume adjustment.
6-10-9 Battery charge function Provided. In use of the Canon compact power adapter CA-560, it is allowed to charge the battery
pack while it is mounted on the camcorder. (With the main power switch turned off, or in the
VCR stop mode) (For a period of charging, the charge lamp blinks. (Charge level of 0% to
approx. 75%: Single blinking, Charge level of 75% to approx. 95%: Double blinking) Or, the
charge lamp remains lit. (On completion of charging: Charge level of 95% or higher))
Charge time (with power switch turned off)
BP-508 : Approx. 60 min.
BP-511/BP-512 : Approx. 80 min.
BP-522 : Approx. 135 min.
BP-535 : Approx. 195 min.

1-20
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-10-10 File transfer (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

When the USB port on the PC and the USB port on the camcorder are connected using the
included interface cable (IFC-300PCU), still images (JPEG files) recorded on the memory card
can be transferred to the PC.
If the “ZoomBrowser” program (for Windows) or “ImageBrowser” program (for Macintosh) on
the included Digital Video Solutions Disk is installed on the PC in advance, you can transfer the
desired images to the PC while viewing thumbnails of the still images recorded on the memory
card.
6-10-11 A/D conversion (Not applicable to PAL models)
This function performs real-time conversion of analog AV signals input to the AV terminal into
digital DV signals and outputs them through the DV terminal.
When an 8 mm video player or VHS video player is connected with the camcorder using an AV
cable, and the camcorder is connected to a PC using a DV cable, playback images can be trans-
ferred from the 8 mm tape or VHS tape to the PC. (Under the VCR settings on the VCR menu
screen, set “AV input → DV Output” to ON.
7 Terminals
7-1 DV terminal Special 4-pin connector (IEEE 1394 compatible), both input and output. (Output only on PAL
models)
7-2 S-video terminal 4-pin mini DIN, both input and output (Output only on PAL models)
7-3 Video/audio terminal φ 3.5mm dia., 4-pole pin jack (yellow), both input and output. (Output only on PAL models)
In common use as headphone terminal
7-4 External microphone input terminal φ 3.5mm dia. stereo mini jack.
7-5 Headphone terminal φ 3.5mm dia. stereo mini jack.
In common use as Video/audio terminal
7-6 Edit terminal φ 2.5mm dia. mini-mini jack, LANC compatible.
7-7 Memory card connection terminal Special multi-pin jack (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only).
7-8 Battery terminal Special 4-pin jack.
7-9 USB port Special 5-pin (mini-B type : DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
8 Power supply
8-1 Input power supply 7.4VDC (battery pack), 9.5V DC (DC IN).
8-2 Power consumption DM-MV550i E During shooting : Approx. 3.3 W (using CVF); approx. 4.1 W (using LCD monitor)
During playback : Approx. 4 W (using LCD monitor)
DM-MV530i E During shooting : Approx. 3.3 W (using CVF); approx. 4 W (using LCD monitor)
During playback : Approx. 3.9 W (using LCD monitor)
DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
During shooting : Approx. 3.1 W (using CVF); approx. 3.9 W (using LCD monitor)
During playback : Approx. 3.6 W (using LCD monitor)
9 Size (width × height × depth) Approx. 58 × 99 × 144 mm
Approx. (2 1/4 in × 3 7/8 × 5 5/8 in)
10 Weight
10-1 Camcorder alone
DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E models
Approx. 530 g (approx. 1 lb, 2 3/4 oz)
DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
Approx. 525 g (approx. 1 lb, 2 1/2 oz)
10-2 Total equipped weight Approx. 630 g (approx. 1 lb, 6 1/4 oz)*1 ; approx. 620 g (approx. 1 lb, 5 7/8 oz)*2;
Approx. 625 g (approx. 1 lb, 6 oz)*3 ; approx. 615 g (approx. 1 lb, 5 3/4 oz) *4
*1: (includes BP-512, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium button battery, and MMC-8M (for BP-512
with DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E))
*2: (includes BP-508, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium button battery, and MMC-8M (for BP-508
with DM-MV530i E))
*3: (includes BP-512, DVM-E30, lens cap and lithium button battery
(for BP-512 with DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E))
*4: (includes BP-508, DVM-E30, lens cap and lithium button battery
(for BP-508 with DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E))
11 Environmental conditions
11-1 Performance guarantee conditions 0°C ~ 40°C 85% (relative humidity)
11-2 Operation guarantee conditions −5°C ~ 45°C 65% (relative humidity)

1-21
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

4. System Charts

WS-20 Wrist Strap

WD-30.5 Wide-
converter
SS-800 Shoulder Strap

WL-D77
Wireless
Controller
TL-30.5 Tele- MiniDV
converter Video BP-500 Series
Cassette Battery Pack
CR-560 Charge Adapter/
Car Battery Cable Kit

FS-30.5U
Filter Set

CA-560 Compact
Power Adapter

ZR-1000 Zoom BP-500 Series

Remote Controller Battery Pack

S-150 S-video Cable

VCR
MV550i VL-3 Video Light
PC-A10
SCART
STV-250N Adapter
Stereo Video Cable

TV
MV550i DM-50 Directional
Stereo Microphone
CV-150F DV Cable Digital Device

PC Card Adapter

BP-900 Series VL-10Li USB Card Reader

Battery Pack Battery VideoLight MultiMediaCard FD Adapter
or
SD Memory Card
Stereo Microphone
(commercially
available) IFC-300PCU USB Cable

CV-150F/CV-250F DV Cable Personal Computer

SC-1000 Soft
Carrying Case

Fig. 1-4

1-22
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5. Overview of Viewfinder / LCD Panel Displays

5-1 Camera Mode

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Camera mode

Zoom display
(appears for approx. 4 sec. after
zoom operation)
Optical zoom W T

88× / 72 ×digital zoom W T For DM-MV550i E at 88× and

DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500 i E,
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E at 72×
440× / 360 ×digital zoom W T For DM-MV550i E at 440× and
DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500 i E,
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E at 72×
Zoom stopped W T

Zooming to Tele W T

Zooming to Wide W T

Image stabilizer display

Image stabilizer ON
Image stabilizer OFF No display

Recording mode display

SD mode SP recording
LP recording
SDL mode SP recording
DM-MV550i E only
LP recording

Operation mode display During mirror shooting mirror mode (LCD)

Recording Red display
Recording pause Green display
Stopped Green display
Cassette ejected Green display
+ Rec search Green display
− Rec search Green display

1-23
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Program AE mode display
Full auto mode
Auto mode
Sports mode
Portrait mode
Spotlight mode
Surf & snow mode
Low-light mode
Night mode is selected

Program AE mode menu

Tape counter display

Time code

When indeterminate
Zero set memory M

When indeterminate M

AE shift display
Minimum exposure value

Standard Setting

Maximum exposure value

AE No display

Timer display

1-24
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Remaining tape display

Tape end
When indeterminate
Tape warning display Flashes red.
Other No display

Focus mode display

AF OFF
AF ON No display

Self-timer display Mirror mode (LCD)

Self timer standby

Timer operating
blinks

Other No display

Battery level Approx. 100% remaining.

Approx. 75% remaining.
Approx. 50% remaining.
Approx. 25% remaining.
Approx. 0% remaining Flashes red.
With power supply adapter mounted No display

Shutter speed display

1/50 sec.
1/120 sec.
1/250 sec.
1/500 sec.
1/1000 sec.
1/2000 sec.
1/4000 sec.
1/8000 sec.
Auto No display

1-25
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

White balance display
When set
Indoor preset
Outdoor preset
Auto No display

Condensation warning display Frashes red.

Remote control cord display

When cord setting 1 is selected
When cord setting 2 is selected
Remote control receptor OFF

Headphone sound volume level display

Volume OFF OFF

Card mix display DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only

Digital feature display

When auto fade is selected
When wipe (left/right) is selected
When wipe (top/under) is selected
When art is seleted
When black & white is selected
When sepea selected
When mosaic is selected
When multi-screen is selected DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only
When feature-off is selected No display

Digital feature menu

Multi screen is
for DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only.

1-26
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Digital feature selection (Multi screen available only in DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E)

Press the “D.E. SEL” button in Camera mode, VCR mode, or Card Recording mode. The line where the cursor is located in the
menu is displayed with a turquoise background.
The previously selected items and the corresponding settings are shown in yellow.

OFF

In fader selection

OFF

Mosaic fade available only

in VCR mode

In effect selection

OFF

OFF

In multi screen selection In multi screen speed selection

In multi screen count selection

1-27
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Wind cut display
Wind cut ON No display External microphone connectd.
Wind cut OFF OFF

Date/time display PAL models

When date and time are not set PAL models

Audio mode display

When 16 bits is selected
When 12 bits is selected

16 : 9 mode display
When the 16:9 mode is selected
Other No display

Partially pressed lock display

Advanced shoe information DM-MV550i E only

In effective connection with DM-50 C

In effective connection with VL-3 C

In no accessory connection No display

Photo mode display

In normal recording No display
When photo mode is selected

1-28
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-2 VCR Mode

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

VCR mode

OFF

Audio output display

When 12-bit stereo 1 is selected
When 12-bit stereo 2 is selected
When 12-bit mix 1:1 is selected
12-bit mix variable is selected
16-bit No display

Audio mix ratio display

When ST-1:ST-2 = 1:0

When ST-1:ST-2 = 1:1

When ST-1:ST-2 = 0:1

Recording mode display

SD mode SP recording
LP recording
SDL mode SP recording
DM-MV550i E only
LP recording

Operation mode display

Recording Red display
Recording pause Green display
When the cassette is ejected Green display
When stopped Green display
Playback Green display
Fast forward Green display
Rewind Green display
No tape Green display
Fast forward playback Green display
2× speed playback Green display
1× speed playback Green display

1-29
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Forward slow playback Green display
Forward frame playback Green display
Forward still playback Green display
Reverse still playback Green display
Reverse frame playback Green display
Reverse slow playback Green display
Reverse 1× speed playback Green display
Reverse 2× speed playback Green display
Rewind playback Green display

Forward date/photo search

Reverse date/photo search

FF return
REW return
AV insert pause Green display Not applicable
AV insert record Red display to PAL models
Audio dubbing pause Green display
Audio dubbing Red display

Tape counter
Time code display

When no setting
Zero set memory Same as in the Camera mode.

Remaining tape display Same as in the Camera mode.

Audio dubbing/insert or search display

When AV insert is selected No function for PAL models
When audio dubbing is selected No display for PAL models
Date search
Still picture photo search
Other than search No indication

Battery level Same as in camera mode.

Remote control display Same as in camera mode.

1-30
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Digital feature display Same as in camera mode,
except for mosaic fade.
When mosaic fade is selected

Battery warning display Same as in camera mode.

Condensation warning display Same as in camera mode.

Audio volume adjustment display

Volume OFF
OFF

Headphone sound volume level display Same as in camera mode.

Data code display

Data code setting
Date and time Camera data Date and time & camera data

Date
Date and time setting

setting

Time
setting

Date &
time
setting

Camera data
Aperture value display The aperture of this product is F1.6-

Aperture fully closed This product has no aperture fully

When no setting closed function.

Shutter speed display The shutter speed of this product ranges

from 1/50 to 1/8000 sec.
Low light mode : fixed 1/25 sec.
When no setting Night mode : 1/2, 1/3, 1/16, 1/12, 1/25
to 1/500 sec.

1-31
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Time display
Time setting is selected

When no setting
Time and time setting are selected

When no setting

Date display

When no setting

Wind cut display Same as in the camera mode.

Audio data display

When the audio dubbing/audio No display (function) for PAL models
input terminal selected
When the audio dubbing/microphone No display for PAL models
input terminal is selected

Audio mode display Same as in the camera mode.

16 : 9 mode display Same as in the camera mode.

DV input display
DV input No display (function) for PAL models
AV input ← → DV output No display (function) for PAL models
Other No indication

1-32
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-3 Card Recording Mode (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Card recording mode

Zoom display Same as in the camera mode.

(Note : Up to 88× (DM-MV550i E) or
72× (DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E,
DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E,
DM-MV490 E) digital zoom)

Image stabilizer display Same as in the camera mode.

Card recorded quality display

Program AE mode display Same as in the camera mode.

Card access display

When card access is set to ON

Motion video display provided by
bitmap (red box moves to right))

Available card capacity display

No card (blinks red)
9999 frames or more

99 frames

5 frames

Zero (0)

1-33
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

AE shift display Same as in the camera mode.

Focus mode display Same as in the camera mode.

Selftimer display Same as in the camera mode.

Battery level display Same as in the camera mode.

Shutter speed display

When auto mode selected.

Lithium battery low-level warning display Same as in the camera mode.

Remote control display Same as in the camera mode.

White balance display Same as in the camera mode.

Battery low- level waring display Same as in the camera mode.

Condensation warning display Same as in the camera mode.

Degital feature display Art, Black and White, Sepia, DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only
Multi-Image Screen.

Data/time display Same as in the camera mode.

(Date and time only)

Half-pressed lock display Same as in the camera mode.

Advanced shoe information Same as in the camera mode. DM-MV550i E only

1-34
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-4 Card Playback Mode (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Card play mode

Print mark display

Protect display

DCF file name display

Directory number-File number

Card access display

Writting to card Red display
Sequential display

When card access is set to “ON” Motion video display provided by bitmap
(red box moves to right)

Reading from card Green display Sequetial display

When card access is set to “ON” Motion video display provided by bitmap
(green box moves to left)

1-35
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Image number display
No card

Checking number of cards recorded

Zero (0) card

9th of 99 cards

99th of 99 cards

9999th of 9999 cards

Data code display Same as in the VCR mode.

(Date and time only)

Slideshow is selected
(No bitmap display)

1-36
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-5 Bitmap Display

MODES WHICH

LINK TO ON-SCREEN
APPEAR

MENU ON/OFF
CARD RECORDING

SETTING
CARD PLAYBACK
TAPE SHOOTING

TAPE PLAYBACK
BITMAP REMARKS

1. Animation at power ON ● ● ● ● × × Displayed only at power ON

from power OFF state (not dis-
played when modes are
changed).

2. When cassette is inserted × × ● × ● × Tape stopped

3. When tape is driven (fast-forward/rewind) × × ● × ● × Forward driving: The reel is

wound clockwise, and light
moves from left to right.
Reverse driving: The reel is
wound counterclockwise, and
light moves from right to left.
4. During card reading (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) × ● × ● ● ● Linked with card reading display
by character generator.
Not displayed during slides, or
during frame movement on in-
dex screen.

5. During card writing (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) × ● ● ● ● ● Always displayed during card
writing.

5a. EVF and EE OUT in mirror shooting mode × ● × × ● ● The word “[CARD]” disappears
for card recording (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) in mirror shooting mirror mode.

5b. EVF and EE OUT in mirror shooting mode × ● × × ● ● The word “[CARD]” disappears
for card recording (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) in mirror shooting mirror mode.
Then the notch of card faces left.

1-37
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MODES WHICH

LINK TO ON-SCREEN
APPEAR

MENU ON/OFF
CARD RECORDING

SETTING
CARD PLAYBACK
TAPE SHOOTING

TAPE PLAYBACK
BITMAP REMARKS

6. During card formatting × × × ● ● × Always displayed during card

(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) formatting.

7. When an image is erased × ● × ● ● × Always displayed when an

(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) image is erased.

8. Power OFF warning ● ● × × × × Displayed starting 20 seconds

before the 5-minute timer expires.

9. USB connection with PC × × × ● × × Always displayed in PC mode.

(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

1-38
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-6 Menu Display

Camera mode, Card Recording mode, VCR mode, and Card Playback mode are provided in the menu display.

Camera Mode (Tape/Camera Mode)

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

CARD MIX *1 Move to Card Mix selection screen

CAM. SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO LITHIUM BATTERY

1/50
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
1/4000
1/8000
D. ZOOM OFF *2 OFF *3 88× *2 72× *2 LITHIUM BATTERY
88× 72×
440× 360×
IMAGE S. ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
16 : 9 ON OFF LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
WHIT BAL AUTO AUTO LITHIUM BATTERY
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP LITHIUM BATTERY
LP
E SP *2
E LP *2
WIND SCREEN ON OFF LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
AUDIO MODE 16bit 12bit LITHIUM BATTERY
12bit
AV/PHONES AV AV LITHIUM BATTERY
PHONES
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS LITHIUM BATTERY

MIRROR ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
D/T DISPLAY ON OFF LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
CARD ACCESS *1 ON OFF LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
DEMO MODE ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN

1-39
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

SYSTEM BUTTON LIGHT *2 ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY

PUSH ON
OFF
LIGHT COLOR *2 GREEN TURQUOISE LITHIUM BATTERY
ORANGE
BLUE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE
WL REMOTE LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
BEEP ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
T. ZONE/DST LONDON PARIS LITHIUM BATTERY
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL 1. JAN. 2002 1. JAN. 2002 LITHIUM BATTERY
12:00 AM 12:00 AM

31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
RETURN

*1 : DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E models only

*2 : DM-MV550i E model only
*3 : DM-MV530i E, M-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E models only

1-40
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Card Recording Mode (Card/Camera Mode) (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

CAM. SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO LITHIUM BATTERY

1/50
1/120
1/250
D.ZOOM OFF *1 OFF *2 88× *1 72× *2 LITHIUM BATTERY
88× 72×
IMAGE S. ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
WHIT BAL AUTO AUTO LITHIUM BATTERY
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
RETURN
CARD SET UP QUALITY FINE FINE LITHIUM BATTERY
STANDARD
FILE NO. RESET CONTINUOS LITHIUM BATTERY
CONTINUOS
SHTR SOUND ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN
VCR SET UP AV/PHONES AV AV LITHIUM BATTERY
PHONES
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS LITHIUM BATTERY

MIRROR ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
D/T DISPLAY ON OFF LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
CARD ACCESS ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
DEMO MODE ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM BUTTON LIGHT *1 ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
PUSH ON
OFF
LIGHT COLOR *1 GREEN BLUE LITHIUM BATTERY
ORANGE
BULE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE
WL. REMOTE LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
BEEP ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF

1-41
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

SYSTEM T. ZONE SEL LONDON PARIS LITHIUM BATTERY

LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL 1. JAN. 2002 1. JAN. 2002 LITHIUM BATTERY
12:00 AM 12:00 AM

31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
RETURN

*1 : DM-MV550i E model only

*2 : DM-MV530i E model only

1-42
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

VCR Mode (Tape/VCR Mode)

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

VCR SET UP RED MODE SP SP LITHIUM BATTERY

LP
E SP *1
E LP *1
BILINGUAL L/R L/R LITHIUM BATTERY
L/L
R/R
AUDIO DUB. *3 AUDIO IN AUDIO IN LITHIUM BATTERY
MIC. IN
WIND SCREEN ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
AUDIO MODE *4 16bit 12bit LITHIUM BATTERY
12bit
AV/PNONES AV AV LITHIUM BATTERY
PHONES
AV DV OUT *4 ON OFF LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN
CARD SET UP *2 QUALITY FINE FINE LITHIUM BATTERY
STANDARD
IMAGE NOS. RESET CONTINUOUS LITHIUM BATTERY
CONTINUOUS
RETURN
CARD OPER. *2 COPY [ ] ] CANCEL CANCEL
EXECUTE
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS LITHIUM BATTERY

DISPLAY ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
6 SEC. DATE ON OFF LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
DATA CODE DATE/TIME DATE/TIME LITHIUM BATTERY
CAMERA DATA
CAM. & D/T
D/TIME SEL DATE DATE & TIME LITHIUM BATTERY
TIME
DATE & TIME
CARD ACCESS *2 ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM BUTTON LIGHT *1 ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
PUSH ON
OFF
LIGHT COLOR *1 GREEN GREEN LITHIUM BATTERY
ORANGE
BLUE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE

1-43
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

SYSTEM WL. REMOTE LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
BEEP ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN
RETURN

*1 : DM-MV550i E model only

*2 : DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E models only
*3 : Not applicable to PAL models (no menu item)
*4 : No function in PAL models

1-44
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

Card Playback Mode (Card/VCR Mode) (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

CARD SET UP COPY [ ] CANCEL CANCEL ---

(with single screen) EXECUTE
PRINT MARK Go to Erase All screen

IMAGE ERASE CANCEL CANCEL ---

SINGLE
ALL
FORMAT CANCEL CANCEL ---
EXECUTE
RETURN
CARD SET UP PROTECT Go to Image Protect screen
(with index screen)
PRINT MARK Go to Print Mark screen

RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP LITHIUM BATTERY
LP
AV/PHONES AV AV LITHIUM BATTERY
PHONES
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS LITHIUM BATTERY

DISPLAY ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
D/TIME SEL DATE DATE & TIME LITHIUM BATTERY
TIME
DATE & TIME
CARD ACCESS ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM BUTTON LIGHT *1 ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
PUSH ON
OFF
LIGHT COLOR *1 GREEN YELLOW LITHIUM BATTERY
ORANGE
BLUE
YELLOW
TURQUOISE
PURPLE
WL. REMOTE LITHIUM BATTERY

OFF
BEEP ON ON LITHIUM BATTERY
OFF
RETURN
RETURN

*1 : DM-MV550i E model only

1-45
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-7 Card-Related Screen Displays (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Card Mix selection screen

Mix key setting screen

Mix Level setting screen

1-46
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Card still image check screen

Image protect set/clear screen

Image erase setting screen

1-47
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Slideshow screen

Index screen

Image protect screen

Printing mark screen

1-48
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Copy screen
Copy ( ) selection screen

Copy ( ) execution screen

1-49
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Copy screen
Copy ( ) selection screen

Copy ( ) execution screen

1-50
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Image erase screen
Image erase selection screen

Erasing one image

Deletion in progress warning

Erasing all images

1-51
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Format screen

Format execution confirmation screen

Format execution screen

1-52
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

5-8 Warning Displays

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED

• An attempt was made to play copy protected tape.

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED

• Copy protection was detected during DV/line input. Or, a TV or video output signal was disturbed at the time of analog input.

SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME

• The area and time were not set when the power is turned on.

REMOVE THE CASSETTE

• A mechanical error has occured or condensation has occurred in a cassette.

CHECK THE DV INPUT

• REC was pressed in a mode where recording is possible but DV was not connected or the connected party could not be
identified.

CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK

• The battery level is low.

CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED

• Condensation is detected (When a cassette is inserted, this message will appear, followed by “Remove the Cassette.”)

THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

• REC was pressed in a mode where recording is possible in the VCR mode and the cassette is erase-protected. Also, the power
was turned on, the Start/Stop button was pressed or a cassette was inserted in the camera mode.

TAPE END
• A key [FF, PLAY] that causes the tape to be fed forward was pressed when tape end was detected or in a mode where tape
forwarding is possible during detection.

CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]

• The audio dubbing button or AV Insert button was pressed in a section of tape that was recorded in the LP mode. Or the LP mode
was detected during audio dubbing or AV insertion.

CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]

• The audio dubbing button was pressed in a section of tape recorded in the 16-bit mode or 4-ch. simultaneous recording mode.
Or the 16-bit mode or 4-ch simultaneous recording mode was detected during audio dubbing.

CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]

• A non-recorded section of tape was detected during audio dubbing or AV insertion.

1-53
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE

• The heads are dirty.

CARD ERROR
• Recording is not possible because of a card error. (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

CARD FULL
• No available space on the card. (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

NAMING ERROR
• The directory name is duplicated, or the file/directory number has reached a maximum (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only).

UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
• An attempt was made to play images recorded in an image format that cannot be played, incompatible JPEG images, or images
in which data has been destroyed. (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

PRINT MARK ERROR

• Too many print marks (51 or more) or the mark file cannot be edited. (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

NO CARD
• No card has been inserted. (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

NO IMAGES
• No images on the card to play. (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

THE CARD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

• With the SD card protected against inadvertent deletion, it has been attempted to record any data on the card in the recordable
mode (VCR mode, card record mode). (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

** On occurrence of any abnormality, a warning message is displayed at the center of the screen for four seconds.
** While a warning message is displayed, only operations allowing mode transition are acceptable. Upon acceptance, the warning
message disappears.

1-54
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6. Backing Up Various Data

6-1 Backup by Main Power Supply

The condensation timer is backed up by the main power supply alone.

6-2 Backup by Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Lithium Button Primary Battery)
The table below lists the item (excluding menu items) backed up by the main power supply or backup power supply (lithium button
primary battery).

Item Default Remarks

Digital zoom position Optical tele end
WB data (SET) ----
Time and date settings (auto date) 2002.1.1. 12:00 AM
Menu cursor position Very top
Time code ----
Mix balance (ZR50 MC A, ZR45 MC A only) Center
Headphone volume Center
Speaker volume Center
Mechanical errors ---- Reset when main power
supply is disconnected.

1-55
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-3 Backup Conditions Related to Switching Actions

6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power

When Camera mode is in “Program AE” mode.
In (Easy Recording) mode, after the power is turned on (Camera), the specifications are the same as in 6-3-3 (Switching to
“Easy Recording”).

Item Power switch OFF, VCR

● Camera mode/Card Recording (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E) mode
Program AE mode type Backup
Manual focus ON/OFF Backup
AE shift setting mode ON/OFF Backup
DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Headphone volume *CAM Backup
Self timer ON/OFF Backup (set to OFF)
On-screen ON/OFF Backup
Zero Set Memory counter value *CAM Backup
● Camera/Card Recording (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E) menu item settings
D. Effects selection Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup *Independent
Effects Backup *Independent
Multi-Image Screen (speed) Backup *Independent
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Multi-Image Screen (number of screens) Backup *Independent
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Card Mix mix key selection *CAM Backup
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Card Mix mix level *CAM Backup
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Shutter speed setting Backup
Digital zoom setting Backup
Image stabilizer ON/OFF Backup
16:9 ON/OFF Backup
White balance setting Backup
Remote control code setting Backup
Recording mode setting *CAM Backup
Confirmation beep ON/OFF Backup
Wind screen ON/OFF Backup
Audio mode setting *CAM *SD (DM-MV550i E only) Backup
AV/headphone selection Backup
LCD brightness adjustment Backup
Mirror shooting setting Backup
On screen ON/OFF Backup
Button light setting (DM-MV550i E only) Backup
Light color selection (DM-MV550i E only) Backup
Time and date display Backup
Area/daylight saving time setting Backup
Time and date setting Backup
Image quality *CD Backup
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Number reset *CD Backup
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

* CAM : Camera mode only *CD : Card Recording mode only (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
* Independent : Independent backup for Card Recording mode, Camera mode, and VCR mode
* SD : Valid only for SP/LP modes
The Card Mix card recording still image selection (Card Mix standby state) is not backed up when the power is turned OFF.

1-56
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-3-2 Switching the Power Switch to a Different Position

Item Power switch OFF

● VCR mode
Headphone volume Backup
Speaker volume Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Zero Set Memory counter value Backup
Data code display ON/OFF Backup
Audio 12-bit output selection Reset (set to "Stereo 1")
Mix balance setting Backup
Photo Search/Date Search for search selection Reset (changes to "Photo Search")
● VCR menu item settings
D. Effects selection Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup *Independent
Effects Backup *Independent
Multi-Image Screen (speed) Backup *Independent
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Multi-Image Screen (number of screens) Backup *Independent
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Remote control code setting Backup
Recording mode setting Backup
Data code setting Backup
Time and date selection setting Backup
LCD brightness adjustment Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF Backup
Date auto-display ON/OFF Backup
Bilingual setting Reset (set to "Main + Sub")
Audio dubbing input setting Backup
Wind screen ON/OFF Backup
LINE IN audio mode setting Backup
AV/headphone selection Reset (set to "AV")
Button light setting (DM-MV550i E only) Backup
Light color selection (DM-MV550i E only) Backup
Confirmation beep ON/OFF Backup
Image quality (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) Backup
Number reset (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) Backup
● Card Playback mode (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
On screen ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
Data code display ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF)
● Card Playback mode menu item selection (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Remote control code setting Backup
Recording mode setting Backup
Data code setting Backup
Time and date selection Backup
LCD brightness adjustment Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF Backup
Date auto-display ON/OFF Backup
Button light setting (DM-MV550i E only) Backup
Light color selection (DM-MV550i E only) Backup
Confirmation beep Backup

* Independent : Independent backup for Card Recording mode, Camera mode, and VCR mode

1-57
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

6-3-3 Switching Camera Modes/Switching Program AE Modes

The following table presents the backup state performed for various data when the / switch is switched from (Program
AE) to (Easy Recording), or when the / switch is set to and the mode is switched to a different Program AE mode.

Item Switched to Switched to Program AE mode

(Easy Recording)
● Camera mode/Card Recording mode (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Program AE mode type *1 ----
Auto focus ON/OFF Reset (set to ON) Backup
AE shift setting mode ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) *2 Reset (set to OFF)
DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (set to OFF) Backup
Headphone volume Backup Backup
Self timer ON/OFF Backup Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup
Zero Set Memory counter value *CAM Backup Backup
● Camera/Card Recording (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E) menu item settings
D. Effects selection Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Effects Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Multi-Image Screen (speed) Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Multi-Image Screen (number of screens) Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Card Mix mix selection *CAM Backup Backup
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Card Mix mix level *CAM Backup Backup
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Card Mix card recording image selection Reset Backup
(Card Mix standby state)
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Shutter speed setting Reset (set to "Auto") Reset (set to "Auto")
Digital zoom setting Backup Backup
Image stabilizer Reset (set to ON) Backup
16:9 ON/OFF *CAM set to "OFF" *2 Backup
White balance setting Reset (set to "Auto") Backup
Remote control code setting Backup Backup
Recording mode setting *CAM Backup Backup
Confirmation beep Backup Backup
Wind screen Backup Backup
AV/headphone selection Backup Backup
Audio mode setting *CAM Backup Backup
LCD brightness adjustment Backup Backup
Mirror shooting setting Backup Backup
On screen ON/OFF Backup Backup
Button light setting (DM-MV550i E only) Backup Backup
Light color selection (DM-MV550i E only) Backup Backup
Time and date display Backup Backup
Area/daylight saving time setting Backup Backup
Time and date setting Backup Backup
Image quality *CD (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) Backup Backup
Number reset *CD (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only) Backup Backup
* CAM : Camera mode only *CD : Card Recording mode only (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
* Independent : Independent backup for Card Recording mode, Camera mode, and VCR mode
*1 : When is set again, “Auto” is set.
*2 : When is set again, the state preceding the switch to “ ” (Easy Recording) is restored.
• Card Mix card recording still image selection (Card Mix standby state) is not backed up, even if there is a switch
between Normal and Progressive.
• The backup operations at LANC power-OFF and power-OFF activated by the recording pause 5-minute timer are the
same as when the power switch is turned OFF.
1-58
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7. Other Features

7-1 Green Mode

Default Settings in Green Mode

• Focus ------------------------- AUTO
• Exposure -------------------- AUTO
• White balance --------------- AUTO
• DE, DF ---------------------- OFF
• Image stabilizer ------------- ON
• Shutter ----------------------- AUTO
• 16:9 -------------------------- OFF

Other settings are the same as before even when the mode is changed to Green mode.

The Following Keys do not Work in Green Mode

• Focus (Auto/Manual) button (always set to Auto)
• Exposure (AE/AE Shift) button (always set to Auto)
• Multidial
• Digital effects (ON/OFF) button (always set to Off)

Relationship Between Program AE Mode and Various Shooting Functions

Program AE Mode
Setting (Easy Recording) (Auto) (Sports) (Portrait) (Spotlight) (Surf & snow) (Low light) (Night)
Autofocus ON/OFF Always ON ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shutter speed setting × ● × × × × × ×
AE Shift × ● ● ● × × ● ×
Image stabilizer ON/OFF Always ON ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
White balance setting Always Auto ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Wind screen ON/OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digital zoom ON/OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Always OFF
16:9 ON/OFF Always OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digital fader ON/OFF × ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digital effects ON/OFF × ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Multi-image screen ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ×
(DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)
Photo shooting ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(recorded to tape)
Progressive photo shooting* ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ×
Card mix* × ● ● ● ● ● × ×

* : DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only

7-2 On Screen
• On Screen can be turned on or off using the LANC or infrared remote control and menu.
• When On Screen is ON, the text characters on LINE OUT are shown in white (characters on the LCD panel and CVF are shown
in color).
• The default setting is ON in Camera mode, and OFF in VCR mode.

1-59
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-3 Headphones and Speaker

• In Camera mode, the speaker is OFF.
• The speaker is on during normal playback in VCR mode. Volume is controlled using the multi-dial.
• Headphone volume can only be controlled when headphones are selected in the menu. The volume is controlled using the multi-
dial.
• The speaker is OFF when headphones are selected on the menu.

7-4 Battery Indicator, Low-Power Warning, and Low-Power Shutoff

Battery Indicator
• When a battery is used, the battery indicator is displayed at one of five levels (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 0% (approximate)). These
levels indicate the amount of power remaining before the low-power warning indicator appears. The battery indicator is reset
when the power is turned off. Thus if the voltage is restored while the power is off, the battery indicator level may increase when
the power is turned back on. However, if the low-power warning appears, it will still be displayed even if the voltage is restored
between when the power is turned on and off.
• When an AC adapter is used, the battery indicator is not displayed. However, the low-power warning is displayed if the voltage
drops below the low-power warning level due to an abnormality. When the voltage is restored above the low-power warning
level, the low-power warning disappears.
• The low-power warning is displayed when the battery terminal voltage falls to approx. 6.3 V or less (for this product).

7-5 System Data Displays

Camera Mode VCR Mode

PB
Camera Screen REC Search DIF Input Blue Background
(including Superb Playback)
Data code (timestamp) × × × × ●
LANC is output LANC is output --- ---
Data code (camera data) × × × × ●
F - - - etc. F - - - etc.
Time code ● ● ● ● ●
Main unit
Audio mode (12/16 bit) ● × ● × ●
4-second display DIF side
Wide/Normal ● × ● × ●
Setting display DIF side
CGMS (warning) × ● ● × ●
DIF side
SP/LP ● ● ● ● ●
Setting display Setting display Setting display

* The time code display reads “-.- -:- -:- -” when no tape is inserted or when the camcorder is at an unrecorded tape position.
* CGMS : If the data is copy-protected, it is not output to LINE OUT or the CVF (panel).

7-6 Data Code Display

Data codes can be used to turn the display ON/OFF independently (i.e., independent of the ON/OFF status of other On Screen
character displays).

7-7 MP Tape Support

LP recording (as well as ESP and ELP recording on DM-MV550i E) onto MP tape is not possible. When a tape is loaded with LP
( E SP or E LP on DM-MV550i E) selected on the menu, the setting is automatically switched to SP. During playback, the tape is
played in LP if it was recorded in LP.

1-60
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-8 Confirmation Beep

In the following cases, beep melodically.

Mode Sound
Power ON Peep
When tape with erase protection is loaded (Camera mode) Peep, peep, peep
When EJECT cover is opened all the way (even when power is OFF) Peep, peep
When recording is started (Camera mode) Peep
When recording is paused (Camera mode) Peep, peep
When Photo button is half-pressed Peep, peep
When photo recording starts Peep
When a condensation or a mechanical error occurs, or five seconds Beep × 5
before the REC PAUSE(*) five-minute timer ends
When the SET button is pressed on an unavailable menu item Boop
10, 15, and 20 seconds before the REC PAUSE (*) five-minute timer ends Beep, beep, beep
Self timer (synchronized with tally blinking) Peep, peep, 1-sec. interval × 8
Peep, 0.25-sec. interval × 8

REC PAUSE (*) includes REC PAUSE for audio dubbing and AV Insert.
* High beeps are 4 KHz tones. Low beeps are 2 KHz tones. Low buzzes are 1 KHz tones.

7-9 Using Analog Line Recording and DV Recording

(1) Move the power switch to “VCR” and move the Tape/Card switch to “Tape”. The power LED lights up, and if a cassette has been
inserted, it will be stopped. The terminal (DV, S, AV) states are set to Output. In addition, the headphone terminal, which also serves
as the AV terminal (this status is set on the menu), and the speaker, are set to Output (the headphone status takes priority).
(2) Connect a cable from a recording source to the S terminal (video signal) and AV terminal (audio signal), or to the AV terminals
(video and audio signals) or DV terminal and then the power for the recording source.
* If recording is paused during input from terminals other than the DV terminal, then the AV terminal is automatically
set as an AV input terminal.
If more than one of the above terminals is connected at the same time, the active terminal is selected automatically according to the
following order of priority.

Order of priority : DV terminal > S terminal > AV terminal

Note that when the playback screen is displayed (including Superb Playback), the playback screen takes priority.
(3) Press [REC STANDBY] on the remote control.
Recording is paused. If analog line input is being used, the S terminal and AV terminal are switched to input at this time.
(4) To start recording, press [ / ] on the remote control.
This starts recording of video, audio etc. through the terminal selected in step (2)
(Press [ / ] to toggle between recording and pausing.)
(5) Press [■] to stop recording.
Recording is stopped.
* If DV input disappears during DV recording, then recording is stopped.
* If a recording source is input to the DV terminal during analog line recording, recording is continued without
change. When recording is paused, the input is switched to DV input.
* CGMS (Copy Generation Management System; copy protection) input signal

• Only input signals (CGMS = 00) that are not copy-protected can be recorded.
• If a copy-prohibited input signal (CGMS = 11) or single-copy-allowed input signal (CGMS = 10) is detected during recording
or when recording is paused, then recording is paused.
• Blue background is output to the LCD panel and CVF. The speaker and headphone output is muted.
• Both audio and video CGMSD (Copy Generation Management System for Digital) signals are detected during DV input. The
signal with the stronger copy protection setting is used.

1-61
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

The Following Table Summarizes the Input and Output Statuses in Different Modes.

DV input signal No DV input signal

LCD, CVF DV terminal S, AV terminals LCD, CVF DV terminal S, AV terminals
Playback Playback screen OUT OUT Playback screen OUT OUT
(including Superb Playback)
No tape, STOP, FF, REW DV input screen IN OUT Blue background OUT OUT
REC PAUSE, REC DV input screen IN OUT Line input screen* IN IN

* : No signal if there is no LINE input.

7-10 Support for Analog Signal I/O Copyright Protection Signals

(1) Detection of copyright protection signals added to input signals
• Detected copyright protection signals: Pseudo-synch pulses and CGMSA (Copy Generation Management System for analog)
signals
• Signal detection time : 20 seconds maximum
(2) Copyright protection signals added to output signals
• Macrovision (pseudo-synch pulses) : Not added
• CGMSA signals : Not added

7-11 Video ID1 Detection/Output Support

(1) S1 signal output (NTSC, PAL, and iPAL models)
When a Full mode (squeezed) video signal, consisting of 16:9 video compressed to 4:3, is output from the S terminal, an S1-
compatible wide monitor will detect an identification signal for automatically restoring the 16:9 video (e.g., during playback of a
tape recorded in Camera 16:9 mode or a tape containing system data related to the aspect ratio).
• NTSC → 16:9 Full mode + 4:3 Letter Box mode identification signal output
• PAL → 16:9 Full mode identification signal output
(2) Video ID1/WSS output (video ID1 is for NTSC models only; WSS* is for iPAL and PAL models only)
• When a Full mode (squeezed) video signal, consisting of 16:9 video compressed to 4:3, is output from the composite video
terminal or S terminal, a video ID1/WSS-compatible wide monitor will detect an identification signal for automatically restoring
the 16:9 video (e.g., during playback of a tape recorded in Camera 16:9 mode or a tape containing system data related to the
aspect ratio).
WSS : Wide Screen Signaling
(3) Detection of S1 signal or video ID1/WSS during line input (ID1 is for NTSC models only; WSS is for iPAL model only)
• A video ID1/S1 or WSS signal multiplexed onto a video signal input from the composite video terminal or S terminal is
detected, and system data relating to aspect ratio information is recorded.

7-12 Closed Caption Detection and Output

(1) Closed caption signal output (NTSC models only)
• When a tape containing closed caption information is played, the closed caption signal is multiplexed onto the video signal and
output.
• Subtitles are displayed on screen by monitors containing a closed caption decoder.
(2) Closed caption signal detection (NTSC models only)
• During recording with analog or digital line input, closed caption information is detected from the input signal and recorded.

1-62
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-13 Audio Dubbing

7-13-1 Tapes to which Audio Dubbing can be Added

Audio dubbing can only be added to tapes with 12-bit/SP recording (other than 4-channel simultaneous recording). The camcorder
switches to Stop mode if audio dubbing is attempted on other tapes.
The camcorder switches to Stop mode (a warning is displayed) if LP mode is detected, or if any of the following are detected: 16-
bit mode, 4-channel simultaneous recording, no recording, SDL recording.

7-13-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source

Select an audio dubbing input source on the VCR menu. (There is no menu on PAL models. The microphone is the only audio
dubbing input source for these models.)
There are two audio dubbing options : “Line (AV terminal)” and “Microphone”. If Microphone is selected and an external micro-
phone is connected, then the external microphone is used as input. If no external microphone is connected, then the built-in
microphone is used as input.
The settings for line video output are as follows.
(1) When AV terminal input is used: The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Input mode. The speaker output can be monitored.
(2) When external microphone input is used: The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Output mode. The speaker is off and line
monitoring is possible.
(3) When built-in microphone input is used: The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Output mode. The speaker is off and line
monitoring is possible.

7-13-3 Audio Dubbing Procedure

(1) In VCR mode, play and pause the tape at the position where you want to add audio dubbing. Next, press the [Audio dubbing] key
on the remote control.
The camcorder switches to Audio Dubbing mode (Audio Dubbing pause), and (Audio Dubbing pause) is displayed on the LCD
panel (CVF).
(2) Push the Pause [ ] key and input the audio through the microphone, etc.
This starts the audio dubbing process.
(3) When you want to stop, press the Stop [■] key.
Audio Dubbing mode ends and the Audio Dubbing display disappears. The camcorder is stopped.
• You can press the Pause [ ] key instead of the Stop [■] key to return to the condition in step (1) (Audio Dubbing pause) without
exiting Audio Dubbing mode.
• Another way to exit Audio Dubbing mode is to press the [Audio Dubbing] key during Audio Dubbing pause.
• If the [Zero Set Memory] key on the remote control is pressed in advance at the tape position where you want audio dubbing to
end, then after step (2), the camcorder will automatically stop at the set position and audio dubbing will end.
* Audio input sources from the DV terminal cannot be used for audio dubbing. When Audio Dubbing mode is set,
nothing is output from the DV terminal.
* The only audio that can be heard through the audio monitor is the input audio. The playback audio cannot be
monitored.

7-13-4 CGMS
• A CGMSA signal added to an analog-input video signal cannot be detected while a tape is being played. During audio dubbing,
the yellow video terminal must be disconnected.
• Do not activate Audio Dubbing mode at copy-protected locations on a copy-protected tape. When the tape moves from a
copyable area to a copy-protected area, the camcorder stops.

1-63
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-14 AV Insert (Not Available on PAL Models)

In AV Insert mode, an ITI (Insert and Track Information) area is kept and audio, video, and sub-codes are overwritten.

7-14-1 Tapes that can be Used with AV Insert Mode

Only tapes with SP recording can be used with AV Insert mode. If an attempt is made to enter AV Insert mode with any other type
of tape, the camcorder switches to Stop mode. The camcorder stops (and displays a warning) if LP mode is detected, or if no
recording or SDL is detected.

7-14-2 AV Insert Signal Input Source Selection

The input source is selected automatically according to the following order of priority:

DV terminal (ACK detected) > AV terminal detected > No connection

The settings for line video output are as follows.
(1) When DV terminal input is used : The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Output mode. The speaker output can be monitored.
(2) When AV terminal input is used : The S terminal and AV terminal are set to Input mode. The speaker output can be monitored.
(3) When there is no connection : The S terminal and AV terminal are OFF. The speaker output is muted.

7-14-3 AV Insert Procedure

(1) In VCR mode, play and pause the tape at the position where you want to insert AV. Next, press the [AV Insert] key on the remote
control. The camcorder switches to AV Insert mode (AV Insert pause), and “ ” (AV Insert pause) is displayed on the LCD panel
(CVF).
(2) Push the Pause [ ] key and input the video and audio.
This starts the AV insertion process. ● (AV Insert) is displayed on the LCD panel (CVF).
(3) When you want to stop, press the Stop [■] key.
AV Insert mode ends and the AV Insert display disappears. The camcorder is stopped.
• You can press the Pause [ ] key instead of the Stop [■] key to return to the condition in step (1) (AV Insert pause) without
exiting AV Insert mode.
• Another way to exit AV Insert mode is to press the [AV Insert] key on the remote control during AV Insert pause.
• If the [Zero Set Memory] key on the remote control is pressed in advance at the tape position where you want AV insertion to
end, then after step (2), the camcorder will automatically stop at the set position and AV insertion will end.

7-14-4 CGMS
• AV insertion for both DV input and analog input is only possible when there is no copy protection (CGMS = 00).
• If a value other than “00” is detected for CGMS, then the camcorder changes to Stop mode.

1-64
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-15 Analog/Digital Signal Conversion (Does not Apply to PAL Models)

This function can be used as an A/D conversion function for inputting an analog AV signal from an analog device to a PC.

7-15-1 A/D Signal Conversion Procedure

(1) Connect the output terminal of the analog device with the analog terminal of the camcorder using STV-250N (or using S-150 if
necessary). Also connect the DV terminal of the camcorder with the IEEE1394 port on the PC using CV-250F or CV-150F.
(2) Move the camcorder’s power switch to [VCR] and move the Tape/Card switch to “Tape”, setting the operating mode to Stop mode
without inserting a tape.
(3) Select this function (A/D signal conversion) from the VCR setting item on the menu. Specifically, set “AV input → DV” to “ON”.
(4) Open the motion video acquisition software program on the PC and output the analog AV signal from the analog device.
The analog AV signal from the analog device is converted by the camcorder to a digital signal (DV signal). The PC can then acquire
the video and audio from the analog device, making it possible to record motion video and still images as needed.

7-15-2 CGMS
• A/D signal conversion for both DV input and analog input is only possible when there is no copy protection (CGMS = 00).
• If a value other than “00” is detected for CGMS, then the A/D signal conversion function is closed, the LCD panel/CVF changes
to blank background, the audio output is muted, and the following warning message is displayed: “COPYRIGHT PROTECTED
DUBBING RESTRICTED”.

7-16 Multi-Dial
VCR operations and various settings can be performed in this mode.

When the Dial is Turned

Multi-Dial Mode Operated Function When Dial is Turned Upward
During menu selection Item selection The cursor moves up.
Menu During LCD brightness adjustment Brightness adjustment The LCD screen grows brighter.
During card mix level adjustment Mix level adjustment The mix level range becomes smaller.
During AE Shift AE level correction Pictures are taken with more brightness.
During manual focus Focus adjustment The focus moves closer.
During VCR mode Speaker volume adjustment The volume increases.

When Dial is Pushed

Multi-Dial Mode Operated Function Dial Push
Shooting pause Open/close Program AE menu Program AE mode selection.
(sets selected item)
During Digital Effects Digital Effects mode selection switch Digital Effects mode is selected.
On menu Menu item setting switch The item is selected.

1-65
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-17 LCD Panel/CVF (Color Viewfinder)

LCD panel and CVF power statuses

7-17-1 Camera Mode and Card/Camera Mode

LCD Panel Layout LCD Panel Power CVF Power

Closed (panel faces camcorder body) OFF ON
Closed (panel faces outward) ON OFF
Mirror mode automatic clearing
Open ON OFF
Mirror shooting* ON ON

* In Mirror mode, the panel display is restricted (CVF and On Screen is normally displayed). Only the symbols
shown below are displayed in the upper left part of the screen.

• Camera mode: Only the following are displayed: Record [ ] Record Pause [ ], Eject [ ].
• Card Recording mode: No Card [ ], Card Inserted & Access [ <<<<]
(Mirror mode is closed temporarily when REC search is performed or when various menu settings are made.)

7-17-2 VCR Mode and Card Playback Mode

LCD panel layout LCD panel power CVF power

Closed (panel faces camcorder body) OFF ON
Closed (panel faces outward) ON OFF
Open ON OFF
Mirror shooting ON OFF

1-66
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-18 Memory Card System (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

7-18-1 Card Recording (Recording Still Images onto a Card)

a. Recording a Camera Screenshot as a Still Image

(1) Move the power switch to [Camera] and move the Tape/Card switch to [Card]. Set the Shooting mode switch to or .
(2) The power light turns on. If a recordable card is loaded, it can now be recorded. Set the desired camera angle, framing the shot so
that the subject to be photographed is in the center of the screen. Then half-press the Photo key.
“ ” flashes in white, and the focus and AE are locked. If the image stabilizer is restricted,
“ ” stops flashing in white and is illuminated in green.
(3) When the Photo key is fully pressed, the image at that instant is recorded to the card. During card recording, the red access indicator
(“>>>>”) flashes with the arrows pointing toward the Card Mark ( )
(the display cycle is as follows : (> → >> → >>> → >>>> > → · · ·). During this period, the recorded image is frozen on the LCD
panel (or CVF), allowing you to check the image.
(In Mirror Shooting mode, a white indicator “<<<<” flashes with the arrows pointing toward the “Card Mark ”)
If Card Access is set to ON, a bitmap image is displayed (see 5, 5a, and 5b in the section “5-5 Bitmap display”).
* Do not remove the card while the access indicator is displayed.

b. Recording a VCR Playback Image onto a Card

(1) Play the tape according to the normal playback method. While the tape is playing, half-press the Photo button. Card information
will appear on the screen, and the playback screen will switch to Playback Pause at the same time. Now fully press the Photo button
to record the still image onto the card. Note that this procedure can also be performed during Playback Pause.

c. Recording a DV Input Image onto a Card (Not Applicable to PAL Models)

(1) Move the power switch to [VCR]. The power light turns on, and if a cassette has been inserted, it will be stopped.
(2) Connect a cable from the recording source to the DV terminal, then turn on the power for the recording source.
(3) If no tape is inserted, or if an inserted tape is stopped and the Photo button is half-pressed, card information will appear on the
screen, and the DV input image will be frozen at the same time. Now fully press the Photo button to record the still image onto the
card.
* When an image shot in 16:9 mode is recorded to a card, it is recorded as a vertical image.
* During analog line input (S terminal, AV terminal), still images cannot be recorded to a card.

1-67
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-18-2 Copying ([ ]/[ ])

The copying procedure automatically searches for scenes recorded as still images (photo recordings) on a tape and records them in
sequence as still images onto the card (VCR mode copying ). It is also possible to sequentially record still images from
a card onto a tape as photos (Card Playback mode copying ).

a. Copying [ ]
This procedure automatically searches for scenes recorded as still images (photo recordings) on a tape and records them as still
images onto the card.
(1) Move the power switch to [VCR].
(2) Use the [FF] or [REW] key to move the tape to the desired position. Set the current tape position in front of the still image (photo
recording) that is to be copied.
(3) Press the [Menu] key and select “CARD SET UP” from the main menu. From the “CARD SET UP” submenu, select “Copy”
[ ] and press the [Set] key. A “Cancel/Execute” option appears. To cancel the copying process, select “Cancel” and press
the [Set] key.
To copy the image, select “Execute” and press the [Set] key.
(4) If “Execute” is selected and the [Set] key is pressed, the screen changes to the “Copy Execution” screen (tape information appears
in the upper left corner, and card information in the lower right) and the copying process starts. The copying process consists of a
search for still images on the tape from the current tape position toward the end of the tape. When a still image is found during the
search, it is recorded onto the card. This process is repeated until the tape end is reached or the card is filled with still images.
Press [■] (Pause key) to cancel the copying process partway through.

b. Copying [ ]
This procedure sequentially records still images from the card onto the tape as still image photos.
(1) Move the power switch to [VCR] and move the Tape/Card switch to [Card].
(2) Use the [+] and [−] keys to display the desired image (the first image to be copied). During copying from a card to tape, copying is
done sequentially from the currently displayed image to the last image.
(3) Use the [Menu] key to enter the menu screen and select “CARD SET UP” menu, then press the [Set] key. On the “CARD SET UP”
menu, select “Copy” [ ] and press the [Set] key to change to the Copy Execution screen. A “Cancel/Execute” option
appears. To cancel the copying process, select “Cancel” and press the [Set] key.
To copy the image, select “Execute” and press the [Set] key.
(4) If “Execute” is selected and the [Set] key is pressed, the screen changes to the “Copy Execution” screen (card information appears
in the upper left corner, and tape information in the lower right) and the copying process starts. The copying process consists of
recording the currently displayed still image onto the tape as a photo, then displaying the next image. This process is repeated
sequentially until the last image on the card (or until the end of the tape is reached). Press [■] (Pause key) to cancel the copying
process partway through.

1-68
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-18-3 Card Mix

(1) Move the power switch to [Camera] and move the Tape/Card switch to [Card]. Move the Shooting Mode switch to .
The power light turns on, and if a recordable cassette has been inserted, recording is paused.
(2) Press the [Menu] key, and select “ Card Mix” from the main menu.
(3) On the Card Mix submenu, a still image recorded on the card is momentarily displayed, after which the still image recorded on the
card is mixed with the camera image. You can set the mix type and mix level, and check the mixed image. The camcorder will not
change to Card Mix standby unless at least these steps are performed before pressing the [Menu] key to exit the menu (the camcorder
does not change to standby unless a playable image is recorded to the card).
Press the [+] and [−] keys to switch the selected still image on the card.
Select “Mix Type” and press the [Set] key to display three settings (“Card Chroma key”, “Card Lumi. key”, and “Camera Chroma
key”). Set the desired mixing method from these options.
Select “Mix Level” and press the [Set] key to display a slide bar ( ) that lets you set the mix level. When you have
moved the slide bar to the desired mix level, press the [Set] key to set it.
(4) Press the [Menu] key to exit the menu and change to Card Mix standby state.
(5) Press the Start/Stop button to record Card Mix motion video onto the cassette tape. Press the Photo button to record a Card Mix still
image onto the cassette tape.

* Even after the above settings have been made, the actions listed below will cancel the image selection and cancel
the standby state. If this happens, the image needs to be set again.
• When the power switch is moved to a different mode
• When the Shooting mode switch is moved to Green mode
* Card Mix setting and execution are not allowed in Night mode, or in Low Light mode in Motion video mode.

7-18-4 Card Playback

a. Normal Playback/Slideshow
(1) Move the power switch to [VCR] and move the Tape/Card switch to “Card”. The power light turns on. If there are recorded images
on the card, the last image is displayed. If there are no recorded images on the card, a blue background is displayed and the
following warning message is displayed for approx. four seconds: “NO IMAGES”.
The [+] and [−] keys can be used to display images before or after the current image. If you press the [+] key on the final image, the
first image is displayed. Likewise if you press the [−] key on the first image, the final image is displayed.
(2) Press the [Slideshow] button to start a slideshow beginning with the currently displayed image (images are displayed sequentially
one after the next for approx. five seconds each). Press the [Slideshow] button again to stop the slideshow.
The [Slideshow] key can be used between starting and ending a slideshow.

* The final image is the image with the highest directory number and highest image number. The first image is the
image with the smallest directory number and smallest image number.

b. Index Images
An index image shows six images on a single screen, making it easier to search for images.
(1) Press the [Index] key to switch to the [Index] screen. Press the key again to
return to the previous Playback mode.
Use the multi-dial on the index screen to select images. (A mark appears to
the left of a selected image.)
(2) The multi-dial can be used to sequentially select images on the screen. If the
multi-dial is operated again after selecting the last (or first) image on the screen,
the next screen (or previous screen) is automatically switched to.
Note that the card [+] and [−] keys can be used to switch six images at a time.
When the [Index] key is pressed while an image is selected, the selected image
is displayed normally as a single image.

1-69
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-18-5 Image Protection Setting

Important images can be protected (erase-protected) so that they will not lost even if you inadvertently try to erase them.
(1) Press the [Index] key to change to the “Index” screen, then press the [Menu] key to enter the menu screen.
(2) On the “CARD SET UP” menu, select “ PROTECT ” and press the [Set] key to enter the “Image Protect” screen (six images
are shown on a single screen). On the “Image Protect” screen, the multi-dial can be used to select images in the same manner as
described for the “Index” screen. Press the [Set] key after selecting an image to toggle the protection setting for the selected image
between ON and OFF. You can confirm when an image has been protected because a protect mark ( ) appears.

7-18-6 Print Mark Setting

The print mark (DP0 mark) is a function that lets you automatically specify images to be printed by a printer or digital lab. Print
marks can be set using the following procedure.
(1) Select the “CARD SET UP” submenu as in step (1) of “Image protection setting”.
(2) On the “CARD SET UP” menu, select “ Print mark ” and press the [Set] key to enter the “Print Mark” screen (six images are
shown on a single screen). On the “Print mark” screen, the multi-dial can be used to select images in the same manner as described
for the “Index” screen. Press the [Set] key after selecting an image to toggle the print mark setting for the selected image between
ON and OFF. You can confirm when an image has been print-marked because a print mark ( ) appears.
* Print marks can be set on up to 50 images per card. If an attempt is made to set a print mark is set on a 51st image,
a print mark error occurs and the print mark cannot be set.

7-18-7 Erasing Images

Unneeded images can be erased through the procedures described below.
There are two methods for erasing images:
Erasing images after card shooting is completed
Erasing images only after the shot images have undergone a recording check during shooting onto a card (Card Review; see the next
page)

Erasing Images after Card Shooting is Completed

(1) Move the power switch to [VCR]. When a still image appears, press the [Menu] key to switch to the “Card Playback” menu screen,
then select the “CARD SET UP” submenu.
(2) On the “CARD SET UP” submenu, select “Erase image(s)”.
(3) When “Erase image(s)” is selected, the following options appear: “Cancel/Single/All”. Select the desired option and press the [Set]
key.
a) To cancel the image erasing process, select “Cancel” and press the [Set] key.
b) To erase images one at a time after checking them, select “Erase this” and press the [Set] key. When “Erase this” is selected and
the [Set] key is pressed, the screen changes and the following message appears: “Single?” The options “Yes” and “No” also
appear. To erase the currently displayed image, select “Yes” and press the [Set] key.
To erase a different image, press the card [+] and [−] keys to display the image which is to be erased. Next, select “Yes” and press
the [Set] key to erase the image. When you are finished erasing images, select “No” and press the [Set] key to return to the next
higher menu in the menu hierarchy. If a displayed image is erase-protected, the protect mark ( ) is displayed at the top center
of the screen, and “Yes” is shown in purple, meaning it cannot be selected. To erase such images, it is first necessary to turn off
image protection on the “Image Protect” screen.
c) To erase all images at the same time, select “All” and press the [Set] key. When “All” is selected and the [Set] key is pressed, the
screen changes and the following message is displayed: “Erase all images?” The options “Yes” and “No” also appear. To erase
all images, select “Yes” and press the [Set] key. If you do not want to erase all images, select “No” and press the [Set] key.
Note that even if you select to erase all images, erase-protected images will not be erased.

1-70
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-18-8 Formatting Cards

Formatting is necessary for new cards, and in cases where a “CARD ERROR” message appears or when you want to erase all
images and files on a card. The formatting procedure is as follows.
(1) Select the “CARD SET UP” menu as in step (1) of “Image protection”.
(2) On the “CARD SET UP” menu, select “Format” and press the [Set] key.
(3) A “Cancel/Execute” option appears. To format the card, select “Execute” and press the [Set] key. To cancel the formatting process,
select “Cancel” and press the [Set] key.
(4) If “Execute” is selected and the [Set] key is pressed, the following message is displayed: “Format this card?” The options “Yes” and
“No” also appear. If you really want to format the card, select “Yes” and press the [Set] key. To cancel the formatting process, select
“Cancel” and press the [Set] key.

* Note that formatting erases the following images and files.

* Protected images
* Card Mix sample images prerecorded on the card
* Images and files saved to the card by other devices, PCs, etc.

7-18-9 Card Review

Press the [− / ] key in Card Recording mode to display “Card Still Image
Check” and switch to Card Still Image Check mode. In this mode, you can
change the image protect setting of loaded still images (or still images
being recorded if recording is in progress), and erase images.
To exit this mode, select “Back” with the multi-dial.
Normal mode is also restored when an image is erased.

* Card Review mode cannot be entered if there are no images on

the card, or if the card is an SD memory card that has been pro-
tected.

7-18-10 Image Setting

Press the multi-dial during card playback (single playback) to display “Image Setting” and switch to Image Setting mode. In this
mode, you can change the image protect setting and print mark setting of displayed still images, and erase images.
To exit this mode, select “Back” with the multi-dial.

* Image Setting mode cannot be entered if there are no images on the card.
* Image Setting mode can be entered if the card is an SD memory card that has been protected, but the action items
listed above are disabled and shown in purple.

1-71
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

7-18-11 Card Playback Feeding Jump

During card playback (single playback), you can hold down the card [+] (or [−])
button to skip through displayed card images and make a selection.
The card image numbers are displayed in the following format: “display num-
ber/total number of images”. When you hold down one of the above buttons,
the “display number” is updated. When you release the button, the image cor-
responding to the display number at that time is read from the card and dis-
played.

* When you are skipping forward through the card, if the display
number becomes larger than the total number of images, the counts
starts over at “1”.
* When you are skipping backward through the card, if the display
number falls below “1”, the count restarts at the total number of
images.

−] button
Pressing the [−

−] button
Releasing the [−

Important Information on Cards (Applies to All Modes)

* Important !
• Never remove a card or battery pack, or disconnect the AC power cord, while the card operation light is flashing. Doing so may
destroy (meaning it can no longer be read or played) not only the image currently being recorded, but all other images recorded
on the card as well.
• Move the power switch to the OFF position before inserting or removing a card.

1-72
 CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

CONTENTS
1. P.C.B. Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-1
2. Power Supply Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3
2-1 Startup of Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3
2-2 Power Fuses --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4
2-3 Power Supply Circuits --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
3. Built-in Charger Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
3-1 Outline ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
3-2 Operation at Charging ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
3-2-1 Conditions To Start Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
3-2-2 Progress of Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
4. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-8
4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-8
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-9
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
4-4 Audio Signal Flow -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-12
5. System Control, Servo ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-13
5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-13
5-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
5-3 Servo Control ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-15
5-5 Error Detection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-16
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-16
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-16
5-6 IC Terminal Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-17
5-6-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1302) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-17
5-6-2 FR MI-COM (IC2301) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-20
5-6-3 MODE MI-COM (IC103) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-22
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

1. P.C.B. Functions
(1) MAIN P.C.B.
System-control section
• IC100 E3V REG & RESET : E3V regulator, MODE MI-COM resetting
• IC101 EEPROM : EEPROM for recorder section data
• IC102 LANC INTERFACE : LANC interface
• IC103 MODE MI-COM : System control
• IC104 RESET : MODE MI-COM power switchover
• IC301 MOTOR DRIVE : Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver
• IC302 5.6V REGULATOR : 5.6V regulator for motor driver
Camera section
• IC1100 DIC2S : Camera digital signal processing
• IC1101 SDRAM : DIC2 memory
• IC1301 RESET : CAMERA MI-COM resetting
• IC1302 CAMERA MI-COM : Camera control
• IC1303 EEPROM : EEPROM for camera section data
Video section
• IC2000 VRP2 : Record/play head amplifier
• IC2100 VIF2 : Analog video input/output signal processing
• IC2101 4.6V REGULATOR : 4.6V regulator
• IC2300 FLASH : FR MI-COM memory
• IC2301 VIC3 : Digital VCR signal processing LSI, IEEE1394 interface,
FR MI-COM (mechanism, video/audio control)

IC2301 VIC3
VIC BLOCK DIF BLOCK FR MI-COM.BLOCK
DIGITAL SIGNAL IEEE 1394 DMC-II CONTROL
PROCSSOR INTERFACE VIC CONTROL
DRUM SERVO AIF CONTROL
CAPSTAN SERVO VIF CONTROL
DIF CONTROL

• IC2303 SDRAM : VIC3 memory (64M)

• IC2900 CHARACTER GENERATOR : Character generator for CVF/LCD panel display
• IC2903 2.8V REGULATOR : 2.8V regulator
• IC2904 RESET : FR MI-COM resetting
Audio section
• IC801 AUDIO ITERFACE : Analog input/output signal processing
• IC802 SP DRIVER : Speaker amplifier
• IC803 4V REGULATOR : 4V regulator (for speaker amplifier)
USB section
• IC3500 USB CONTROLER : USB interface
• IC3501 SWITCH : Card mode ←→ USB mode changeover switch
Card section
• IC4000 FLASH : Card firmware memory
• IC4001 V53 : Card control
• IC4002 SDRAM : SIC signal processing memory
• IC4010 SIC : Card video processing, card interface

2-1
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

(2) PCC P.C.B.

CVF section
• IC1501 EVF DRIVER : EVF LCD (CVF) drive
• IC1502 SWITCH : LED panel display character mixing switch
• IC1503 EEPROM : EEPROM for CVF section data
Camera section
• IC1000 TIMING GENERATOR : CCD drive timing generator
• IC1001 CDS/AGC/AD : CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter
• IC1002,3 AND (NAND) : Clock voltage conversion AND gate
• IC1004 RESET : Timing generator resetting
• IC1201 DA CONVERTER : Camera adjustment D/A converter
• IC1202 MOTOR DRIVE : Zoom, focus motor driver
• IC1204,5 OPE AMP : Iris control operational amplifier
• IC1206 NAND : Control signal NAND gate
PM section
• IC3200 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power PWM regulator controller
• IC3201 CHARGE CONTOROL : Charge control
• IC3202 OPE AMP : Charge circuit operational amplifier

(3) CCD P.C.B.

• IC1070 CCD : CCD image sensor

(4) LCD P.C.B.

• IC901 EEPROM : LCD section data EEPROM
• IC902 DA CONVERTER : LCD control signal D/A converter
• IC903 LCD DRIVE : LCD signal processing, drive
• IC3401 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power PWM regulator controller
• IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Back-light drive

(5) CVF P.C.B.

Signal transfer from MAIN P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, back-light LED turn-on

(6) LI P.C.B.
Backup lithium battery terminal, power LED, card slot

(7) JACK1 P.C.B.

LANC, AV, MIC jack, remote control signal reception

(8) JACK2 P.C.B.

LISB Connector
• IC1601 P SENSOR GYRO : Pitch direction angular velocity detection
• IC1602 Y SENSOR GYRO : Yaw direction angular velocity detection
• IC1603 SW : Gyro sensor output reset switch
• IC1605 OPE AMP : Gyro sensor output signal operational amplifier

2-2
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2. Power Supply Circuit

2-1 Startup of Power Supply

CN400
14 LITHIUM
BATTERY
CN406
11 2
POWER SW
12 1

JACK2 P.C.B.
LI P.C.B. 1 14 DMC-II
CN1603
CASSETTE
IN SW
EJECT
SW
15 23, 24 CN101 1 CN82 8 CN301
MAIN P.C.B.
IC104
Q110 SW UNREG
Q111
Q112 POW 5V

3 7
VTR POWER SW 27

3V 8 E3V CAMERA POWER SW 28

REG.

DET 4 107 E3V DET EJECT SW 33 PM SECTION

3V VTR ON
SW 6 109 VCC CASSETTE 34 CAM ON
E3V or LI3V IN SW

RESET 5 114 RESET L VTR ON 60

2.6V
DET.
2 31 LI3 DET CAM ON 61 IC2301
IC100 FR
E 3V REG. IC103 SERIAL DATA MI-COM.
RESET MODE MI-COM. (VIC3)

Fig. 2-1
• Backup Lithium Battery
LI3V power from the lithium battery is input to pin 3 of the IC100, and it is output from pin 6 as power to the MODE microcomputer.
Thus, the MODE microcomputer performs data backup and clock operation when main power supply is not connected.
When the voltage of the lithium battery decreases below 2.6 V (or when the lithium battery is not loaded), the IC100 outputs the “L”
signal form pin 2. Upon receipt of this signal at the time of power-on, the MODE microcomputer sends it to the FR microcomputer,
which then issue a lithium battery low-level warning indication.

• Main Power Supply

Main power (POW 5V at the time of power-on, UNREG at the time of power-off) is supplied to pin 7 of IC100. Through the
internal regulator in IC100, the main power thus supplied is converted to 3V power, which is output as E3V from pin 8 of IC100.
Furthermore, through the internal switch, the main power is converted to LI3V, which is output from pin 6 of IC100 as a power
voltage for driving the MODE MI-COM.
Supplied with the main power, IC100 outputs the “L” signal from its pin 4. When the MODE MI-COM receives the “L” signal, it
recognizes that the power supply is loaded. Then, the MODE MI-COM performs initialization to set up a standby state. In this
state, the MODE MI-COM carries out detection of start-related switch signals. Upon detection of these switch signals, the MODE
MI-COM delivers the VTR ON (H) and CAM ON (H) signals from its pins 60 and 61. When the VTR ON (H) and CAM ON (H)
signals are output, each circuit power is made active.
2-3
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2-2 Power Fuses

PCC P.C.B.

CN3201 D3201
FU3204
1, 2 DC IN UNREG (CHARGE)
FU3200
UNREG 1
CN3200 Q3204
FU3201
1, 2 BATT + UNREG 2

FU3203
VS UNREG

FU3202
SHOE UNREG

DM-FV550i E Only

Fig. 2-2

Battery power is separated into the following five power sources through the five fuses mounted on the PCC P.C.B.

(1) UNREG (CHARGE) : FU3204

Charge circuit power source

(2) UNREG 1 (3V) : FU3200

• 3V circuit power source (LCD 3V, A 3V, HA 3V, DVDD 3V, IS 3V, CAM 3V, CARD 3V, SDRAM 3V)
• 1.7V systems power supply (DVDD1.7V)
• CCD drive power supply (-7.5V, +15V)

(3) UNREG 2 (5V) : FU3201

5V circuit power source (POW 5V, LCD 5V)

(4) UNREG (VS) : FU3202

Drum/capstan VS

(5) UNREG (SHOE) : FU3202

Accessory shoe power source

2-4
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

2-3 Power Supply Circuits

Figure 2-3 shows the power supply circuits.
The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON and CAM ON signals output from the MODE MI-
COM.

39
UNREG

PWM 46 REG. LPF LCD 5V

CH-1 Q3208
IC3200 LPF POW 5V
DC/DC
CONVERTER LPF SDRAM 3.0V
CONTROL LPF LCD 3.0V

LPF A 3.0V
36
UNREG
LPF HA 3.0V

PWM 50 REG. LPF DVDD 3.0V

CH-2 Q3212
LPF CARD 3.0V
Q3213, 14
CAM 3.0V

IS 3.0V
33
UNREG

LPF −7.5V
PWM 56 REG.
CH-3 LPF 15V
Q3207
T3201
19
UNREG

PWM 57 REG. LPF DVDD 1.7V

CH-4 Q3209

ON/OFF 29 CAM ON

ON/OFF 30 VTR ON

PCC P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
VTR ON 6 ON/OFF 21
Q3401 Q3403 Q3402
PWM 10 REG. LCD 7.5V
IC3401 PANEL OFF
7.5V ON
AH8049FHN
PANEL
DC/DC 19 OFF
CONVERTER Q3406
CONTROL
PWM 11 REG. LCD 12V/15V
Q3407
16
Q3404
Q3405
ON/OFF
-10V OFF 3 PWM 13 REG. AL -10V

Fig. 2-3

2-5
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3. Built-in Charger Circuit

JACK2 Q3204 PCC P.C.B.

CN3200 DC IN OFF
P.C.B. 1, 2 BATT +
FU3200
UNREG 1
3, 4 GND FU3201
UNREG 2
CN1605 CN3201
FU3203
DC DC IN 1, 2 1, 2 DC IN VS UNREG
JACK
DM-MV550i E Only
FU3202
SHOE UNREG
BATTERY
FU3204

B
Q3200 Q3203
Q3201
2
D
1
3

LI P.C.B. 15 2 3
7
6
E3V IC3201
CN402 14 VCC
OUTPUT MB3833A IC3202
BATT-E3 1 DRIVE CHARGE NJM2904V
BATT INFO AD 2 CONTROL

OSC POWER SAVE CN1001

A/D I 73 MODE
12 13 7 8 MI-COM.
Q3202 A/D V 76
TRI 74
CN400 PS 77
BATT INFO AD 2 DC J DET 75

MODE
MI-COM.

Fig. 2-4

3-1 Outline
The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows.

(1) MODE microcomputer

• Control of IC3201
• Detection and display of charging progress
• Error discrimination and display
• Battery type discrimination and DC jack input detection

(2) IC3201 (CHARGE CONTROL)

• Charging voltage and charging current control

2-6
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

3-2 Operation at Charging

3-2-1 Conditions To Start Charging

When the following conditions are satisfied, the MODE MI-COM (IC103) controls the IC3201 to start charging.

Conditions Detection Source of detection

Main unit power is turned OFF or is in the VCR STOP mode MODE MI-COM -
DC voltage of 8.8 V or higher is input to the external MODE MI-COM pin 22 DC IN
DC terminal DC JACK DET (CN3201 pin 1, 2)
Battery is installed MODE MI-COM pin 44 Battery D terminal
(CN402 pin 2 at 0.4V or higher) BATT.INFO A/D (CN402 pin 2)

3-2-2 Progress of Charging

The IC3201 starts a trickle charge under control of the MODE MI-COM (IC103). The 5 sec-quick charge and the trickle charge
continues until the battery voltage reaches 5 V. At the point in time when 5 V is reached, the IC3201 starts a 1.55A quick charge. Then,
the charge current decreases gradually with the progress of charging (because of an increase in impedance of the battery). When the
charge current becomes 200 mA or less, the end-of-charging indication is provided. Thereafter, a supplementary charge is performed for
two hours (in the BP508, BP511/BP512) to complete battery charging.

LED flashes once LED flashes twice LED lights up steadily

Charging current

Quick charge 1.55A

When battery voltage

reaches 5V, quick
charge starts. 1.2A

An error is indicated if the battery voltage becomes 5 V or lower during

quick charging or constant-voltage charging.

Trickle
200mA
200mA

Trickle Elapsed
timer Quick charge timer 2-flash timer Supplementary charge timer
time

12 BP508 Timeout BP508 Full charge BP508

minutes
max BP511 : 2Hmax error BP511 : 2Hmax indication BP511 : 2H
BP512 BP512 at timeout BP512
Quick Timeout BP522 : 4Hmax BP522 : 4Hmax BP522 : 4H
charging error BP535 : 5Hmax BP535 : 5Hmax BP535 : 5H
for 5 Total timer
seconds
BP508 Full charge
BP511 : 4Hmax indication
BP512 at timeout
BP522 : 6Hmax
BP535 : 8Hmax

Fig. 2-5

2-7
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4. Signal Processing Circuit

4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit

Figure 2-6 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.

PCC P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. PCC P.C.B.

LENS
IC1001 IC1501
EVF CVF
CDS IC1100 IC1101 LCD
AGC DIC2S SDRAM DRIVER
IC1070 A/D
CCD
IC1000
CCD P.C.B. TG

IC2301
MEMORY DM-MV550i E VIC3
CARD DM-MV530i E
Only
IC1502
IC3501 CG
MIX

LI P.C.B.

IC4010
USB SIC
TERMINAL IC903
IC3501 LCD
USB DRIVER
CONTROLER
JACK2 LCD
P.C.B. IC4002
P.C.B.
SDRAM VIC

JACK1
LCD
P.C.B.
VIDEO IC2100 IC2900
AV
VIF2 CG

AUDIO
IC801 IC2000
AIF3 VRP2
REC/PB
MIC HEAD

DV IC2303
TERMINAL DIF SDRAM

FR
MI-COM.

* PAL model has no DV INPUT and LINE INPUT.

Fig. 2-6

2-8
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing

IC4010
SIC
CH-1 A DATA
IC1001 SW TO
IC1070 CDS IC1100
DIC2S CH-2 B DATA IC2301
CCD /AGC VIC3
/AD
10bit 8bit 8bit
36MHz 36MHz 27MHz 27MHz
TRANSACTION

IC1101
SDRAM

IC4001
V53
: ANALOG

: DIGITAL MEMORY IC4002

CARD SDRAM DM-MV550i E,
DM-MV530i E Only

Fig. 2-7

(1) Camera

<CCD> IC1070
• 1/6 inches interlaced CCD
• Complementary color filter
• 460,000 pixels in total, 290,000 effective pixels

<CDS/AGC/AD> IC1001
A signal read out of the CCD is extracted. Then, after the extracted signal is subjected to AGC processing and A/D conversion, it
is output as a digital signal.

<DIC2S> IC1100
Various camera signal processing operations (EIS, AWB, etc.) and digital effect processing operation are carried out. At the time
of playback, CH-2 is used for input and CH-1 is used for output so that digital effect processing is performed on playback signals.

<SDRAM> IC1101
Field memory for signal processing and digital effect processing

(2) Card

<SIC> IC4010
When the card function is inactive, camera signals are fed to the VIC3 without performing any processing.
• Video signal switching (card mix function) • JPEG compression/decompression
• Memory card interface

<SDRAM> IC4002
Image data memory for Memory card write/read operation

<V53> IC4001
Serves as a card circuit CPU, which carries out firmware stored in the flash memory (IC4000). Through communication with the
MODE microcomputer, SIC control is conducted to perform various card processing operations.

2-9
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

Card Recording (CAMERA)

1) DIC2S captures image.
2) SIC stores image in SDRAM (IC4002).
3) VIC3 captures image and DIC2 releases the capture function.
4) SIC applies JPEG compression to image, and starts writing into Memory card.
5) DIC2S starts camera signal processing, and provides movie image display.
6) When SIC finishes write-in to Memory card, VIC3 releases the capture function.

Card Recording (VCR, DV input)

1) VIC3 captures image.
2) By way of SIC (B DATA) and DIC2S (CH-2), SIC again stores in SDRAM (IC4002) the image captured in SIC (CH-1).
3) SIC applies JPEG compression to the image, and starts writing into Memory card.
4) When SIC finishes write-in to Memory card, VIC3 releases the capture function.
(At playback/recording : Image from VIC3 appearing at LCD and video output is A DATA image via SIC, DIC2S.)
(At DV input : Image from VIC3 appearing at LCD and video output is the image captured at 1).)

Card Playback
1) SIC decompresses the Memory card file.
2) SIC stores an image in SDRAM (IC4002).
3) VIC3captures an image (A DATA) and outputs it at LCD and video output.

Card Mixing
The selected image that has been decompressed at Memory card and stored in SDRAM (IC4002) is mixed with the camera
image via the switch in SIC.

2-10
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-3 Recorder Signal Processing

VIC BLOCK DIF BLOCK

IC2303 SDRAM DIF DV

SDRAM INTERFACE INTERFACE TERMINAL

DM-MV550i E,
DM-MV530I E Only VIDEO
A DATA HEAD
IC4010 VIDEO COMPRESSION REC/PB IC2000
B DATA ECC
SIC INTERFACE /DEMOD. PROCESS VRP2

IC2100 AUDIO IC801 AV

D/A A/D BUS
VIF2 INTERFACE AIF3 JACK

AV JACK
S TERMINAL
CVF R,G,B MI-COM. BLOCK
LCD
LCD IC2301 FR MI-COM.
VIC3
* PAL model has no
DV and LINE inputs.

Fig. 2-8

< VIC3 >IC2301

• The VIC, MI-COM and DIF INTERFACE circuits are integrated on a single semiconductor chip.
• A/B DATA : Input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIC2S digital effect circuit is used
at playback.)
The video data and signals input to VIC3 are subjected to digital VCR format signal processing. Audio data,
subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC3, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of
DV format.
• DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital
input, the data enters VIC3 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.

< VRP2 >IC2000

Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC2 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head
switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC2.

< VIF2 >IC2100

Y and C signals sent from VIC2 are output as Y, C signals for S terminal and composite video.
At line input, input signals undergo level adjustment, sync signal separation and are output to VIC2.

2-11
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4-4 Audio Signal Flow

L INT. MIC
EXT. LINE
MIC EQ
R INT. HPF MIC ALC A/D
AMP
EXT. LINE

REC
IF IC2301 IC2000
L
EXT. PB
VIC3 VRP2
MIC R
D/A REC/
REC
PB
IC801 PB
HEAD
L R AIF3

ADVANCED L
ACCESSORY LINE
SHOE IN/OUT R

AMP
L

HEAD PHONE R
SPEAKER
SOUND
+ IC802
SOUND
FROM FR MI-COM.
−
SPEAKER
DRIVER

Fig. 2-9

< AIF >IC801

Carries out switching between internal and external microphones (by means of serial data from MODE MI-COM),plus ALC (Auto
Level Control), fading, and amplification of various output signals. For the beep tone issued at ejection, etc., the signal from the
MODE MI-COM is generated in the circuit and added to the speaker output signal in AIF.

< SPEAKER DRIVER >IC802

This integrated circuit is used for speaker drive operation.
The microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A, and digital I/F circuits are contained in this IC. It is also used for changeover
between ordinary voice sound and beep sound.

2-12
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5. System Control, Servo

5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo

Figure 2-10 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is mainly
performed by the MAIN MI-COM (IC102) on MAIN P.C.B.

DM-MV550i E,
DM-MV530i E Only MEMORY
CARD

DRUM
IC1001 IC1000 IC1202 IC3200 D-VS
M
CDS TG MOTOR DC/DC C-VS DRUM
AGC DRIVER CONVERTER DRIVER
A/D
PWM C FG/PG
PWM D

CAPSTAN
PCC P.C.B. IC4010
M
SIC DFG/PG CAPSTAN
CFG DRIVER
VIC
FG
IC4001
LENS IC301
IC1100 V53
MOTOR
DIC2S
DRIVER
IC4000
FLASH
LOADING
LOADING
M
DRIVER

IC2301
VIC3 IC2300 DMC II
FLASH

ZOOM
IC1302
SW IC2300
CAMERA FR
LI MI-COM IC1303 MI-COM USB MODE SW
EEPROM CONTROLER C.DOWN SW
START P.C.B. BOT/EOT
/STOP SENS.
SW DEW
REEL FG
IC2000
DIAL VRP2
SW

EJECT
SW HEAD

JACK2 IC103
MIC
P.C.B. MODE
MI-COM

IC2100 IC801
VIF2 AIF3
JACK1
POWER
R-KEY P.C.B.
SW

IC1501 IC2900 IC101 REMOTE

IC901
EVF CG EEPROM CONTROL
EEPROM SIGNAL
DRIVER
RECEIVER
IC102
IC903 LANC
LCD I/F
DRIVER
LANC
JACK
LCD P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B.

Fig. 2-10

2-13
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer

(1) FR MI-COM (VIC3)
The FR MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through communi-
cation with CAMERA MI-COM. It also detects of various sensors and switches (DMCII). Following are the major functions.
• VIC (Video) VIF2 (Video Interface) control / AIF3 (Audio Interface) controls / DIF (Digital Interface) controls
• Control in accordance with IEEE1394
• DMCII mechanism control

(2) MODE MI-COM (IC103)

The MODE MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions.
• Key input
• LANC communication
• LCD / EVF control
• OSD (On Screen Display) control
• Remote control input
• Power ON/OFF control
• Built-in charge circuit control
• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control

(3) CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401)

Carries out lens control and camera signal processing. Following are the major functions.
• CCD drive control
• AE, AF, AWB control
• EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control
• Zoom key input

5-3 Servo Control

Servo control is carried out by the VIC3 (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/OFF and
rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in terms of signal
flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FR MI-COM.
Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal (PWM), which
is driven on the PCC P.C.B. for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.

2-14
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode

IC3501
IC1001
IC1070 CDS IC1100 IC4010 MEMORY
CCD AGC DIC2S SIC CARD
A/D

IC2301 IC3500
FR MI-COM. USB
(VIC3) CONTROLER

Card camera mode of signal flow

FLASH USB
Personal computer connection mode ROM TERMINAL
of signal flow

Fig. 2-11

In the card camera mode, an image signal produced in the camera section is sent to the memory card via the SIC (IC4010). In the
personal computer connection mode, the USB terminal and the memory card are connected through the USB controller (IC3500).
The FR MI-COM performs control of changeover between the card camera mode and the personal computer connection mode. The
SIC (IC4010), USB controller (IC3500), and IC3501 (SWITCH) are also controlled by the FR MI-COM.

2-15
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-5 Error Detection

If an anomality has been occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD indicates
“PLEASE UNLOAD THE CASSETTE” and blinks “EJECT”.

5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.

Kind Condition Detection

Drum error Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG
FG frequency when steady 900Hz
Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%.
Steady : 30% max.
Error detecting time Starting : 5sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Capstan error Error detecting mode Starting / steady C-FG
FG frequency when steady 1347Hz
Error detecting level Starting : 80% max.
Steady : 100Hz max.
Error detecting time Starting : 2sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Reel error Error detecting mode Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG
Error detection Normally : C-FG number per reel FG cycle is C-FG
2.4×1347 or more.
UNLOAD : Reel FG half cycle is 1 sec or more
(Take-up reel only for both)
Loading error Error detecting mode M ode transfer M ode SW
Error detection M ode transfer time
STANDBY-STOP : 6sec
STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec
STOP-PLAY : 3sec

5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table gives processing after error detection.

During Loading During tape

Cassette in Loading During mode
loading completed running
Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop

• Pop up : Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear

• Error stop : Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)

2-16
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-6 IC Terminal Functions

5-6-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1302)

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
1 SO2 O DIC serial data output 5 0 3004 1
2 SCK2 O DIC serial clock 5 0 3004 2
3 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3004 3
4 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3004 4
5 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3004 5
6 VDD - Power supply
7 VSS - Ground
8 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3004 6
9 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3004 7
10 (TEST1) O Unused (Open) 5 0 3006 0
11 (TEST2) O Slow shutter test signal (Open) 5 0 3006 1
12 (TEST3) O PV interrupt test signal (Open) 5 0 3006 2
13 (TEST4) O V sequence test signal (Open) 5 0 3006 3
14 (TEST5) O DIC interrupt test signal (Open) 5 0 3006 4
15 (TEST6) O PS photo test signal (Open) 5 0 3006 5
16 (TEST7) O Iris shutter test signal (Open) 5 0 3006 6
17 (TEST8) O Iris shutter test signal (Open) 5 0 3006 7
18 VPP - Flash program power supply
19 TG GATE O TG output enabled (PULL DOWN) 5 0 3014 0
20 ADJ SW I For adjustment at factory (PULL UP) 5 0 3014 1
21 CG STB O CG strobe output 5 0 3014 2
22 WB SET/X PC REQ I/O For AF debugging/WB debugging 5 0 3014 3
23 CL SET/X PC ACK I/O For AF debugging/WB debugging 5 0 3014 4
24 X PC CS O For AF debugging 5 0 3014 5
25 ADJ REQ I VCR monitor communication request (PULL DOWN) 5 0 3014 6
26 EEP INI I EEPROM initialization request (PULL UP) 5 0 3014 7
27 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3016 0
28 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3016 1
29 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3016 2
30 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3016 3
31 X RESET I Resetting in / FLASH mode
32 XT1 I Sub-clock input (Grounding when not used) 5 0 3016 4
33 XT2 O Sub-clock output (Open)
34 VDD - Power supply
35 XOUT O Main clock output
36 XIN I Main clock input
37 VSS - Ground
38 CLKOUT O Clock output (Open)
39 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3018 0
40 DIC XRST REQ O DIC reset request (To MODE) 5 0 3012 0
41 CAM SS TMG1 O Slow shutter timing signal (To MODE) 5 0 3012 1
42 CAM SS TMG2 O Slow shutter timing signal (To MODE) 5 0 3012 2
43 CAM SS TMG3 O Slow shutter timing signal (To MODE) 5 0 3012 3
44 AS STROBE ON - Unused (Open) 5 0 3012 4
45 - - Unused (Open) 5 0 3012 5

2-17
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
46 NT XPL SEL I NTSC/PAL selection (NTSC: High) 5 0 3012 6
47 DIC READ O DIC data reading 5 0 3008 0
48 X DIC CS O DIC CS (To DIC) 5 0 3008 1
49 X FIC CS O FIC CS (to DIC) 5 0 3008 2
50 X PWM CS O PWM CS (To DIC) 5 0 3008 3
51 FID I NTSC/PAL selection (NTSC: High) 5 0 3008 4
52 CAM RX O MODE MI-COM transmission/ 5 0 3008 5
reception check signal
53 CAM CS O MODE MI-COM communication CS 5 0 3008 6
54 ADJ CS O CS for factory adjustment 5 0 3008 7
55 BVDD - Bus power supply
56 BVSS - Bus grounding
57 X AGC CS O AGC CS (PULL) 5 0 300A 0
58 X TG SEN O TG serial communication enable signal 5 0 300A 1
59 X TG VEN O TG serial communication IS enable signal 5 0 300A 2
60 X TG RST O TG resetting (unused) 5 0 300A 3
61 DA LOAD O D/A load pulse 5 0 300A 4
62 - - Unused (OPEN) 5 0 300A 5
63 F PSB O Focus power saving 5 0 300A 6
64 Z PSB O Zoom power saving 5 0 300A 7
65 F RES SW I Focus resetting detection (PULL DOWN) 5 0 300C 0
66 Z RES SW I ZOOM resetting detection (PULL Down) 5 0 300C 1
67 LED RET O Lens LED ON 5 0 300C 2
68 I ISW O Gyro output bypass capacitor charging switch 5 0 300C 3
69 X IRIS OP O Iris opening 5 0 300C 4
70 IRIS CL O Iris closing 5 0 300C 5
71 AVDD - A/D power supply
72 AVSS - A/D grounding
73 AVREF I A/D reference voltage
74 I ENC I Iris encoder 5 0 300E 0
75 ZOOM KEY I Zoom key input 5 0 300E 1
76 P GYRO I Gyro pitch input 5 0 300E 2
77 Y GYRO I Gyro yaw input 5 0 300E 3
78 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 300E 4
79 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 300E 5
80 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 300E 6
81 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 300E 7
82 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 3010 0
83 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 3010 1
84 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 3010 2
85 - I Unused (GND) 5 0 3010 3
86 NMI I Non-maskable interruption (PULL UP) 5 0 3000 0
87 X DIC IRQ I DIC interruption signal (PULL UP) 5 0 3000 1
88 XSG I TG XSG INTERRUPTION (PULL UP) 5 0 3000 2
89 CAM REQ I MODE MI-COM communication request 5 0 3000 3
(PULL DOWN)
90 VD - VD interruption signal (Unused) 5 0 3000 4
91 EEP RB I EEPROM ready/busy input 5 0 3000 5
92 X EEP RST O EEPROM write protection (PULL UP) 5 0 3000 6

2-18
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
93 X EEP CS O EEPROM CS (PULL UP) 5 0
94 SI0 I EEPROM CG/flash data input 5 0 ADDR DATA BIT
95 SD0 O EEPROM CG/flash data output 5 0 3002 1
96 SCK0 O EEPROM CG/flash serial clock 5 0 3002 2
97 SI1 I MAIN MI-COM serial data input (PULL UP) 5 0 3002 3
98 SO1 O MAIN/FIC/AGC/TG/DA data output 5 0 3002 4
99 SCK1 O MAIN/FIC/AGC/TG/DA clock 5 0 3002 5
100 SI2 I DIC serial data input 5 0 3004 0

2-19
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-6-2 FR MI-COM (IC2301)

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
10 V3TOM PC O PC mode communication : Start of PC mode 7 0 **D0 4
11 USB EN O TELUSBIC enabled 7 0 **D0 1
15 LINE IN O Line input control 7 0 **D4 6
17 VIF CS C VIF communication chip selection (cp. C) 7 0 **D4 0
20 SHUTTER Effect sound PWM output (AUDIO. C, CP. C) 7 0 **D6 4
26 UNLOAD O Lmo unload 7 0 **D1 6
27 DRUM ON O Drum ON 7 0 **D1 2
48 CAS IN Cassette IN detection
58 HP ON O Headphone/AV jack changeover (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 6
59 SP MUTE O Internal speaker muting (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 2
68 TREEL T reeI FG input
101 V3TOM FILE TX O PC mode communication: File transfer in progress 7 0 **D0 5
104 MODE SCK Mode control serial communication clock 7 0 **D8 0
107 PLUG IN I AV jack detection 7 0 **D4 3
110 DA CFG O CFG duty control voltage output 7 0 **D6 6
116 LOAD O Lmo load 7 0 **D1 5
117 CAP ON O Capstan ON 7 0 **D5 4
131 USB CS USB chip selection 7 0 **D9 2
136 WIDE DET S1 wide detection
138 DEW AD Dew detection
145 SST3 (DIC FRAME) I Camera picture control: Frame image 7 0 **D3 3
146 SP STBY O Internal speaker bias power-save mode (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 3
147 XPDI O DA converter power-down (Audio. C) 7 0 **D3 1
152 CAP FWD O Capstan forward drive 7 0 **D8 6
185 MTOV3 PC I PC mode communication: PC mode enabled 7 0 **D0 3
186 USB DET I USB detection 7 0 **D0 0
189 MODE SI I Mode control serial reception data 7 0 **D7 4
190 LET CONT O Letter box output control (VBI. C) 7 0 **D4 4
191 AIF CS O AIF communication chip selection (Cp. C) 7 0 **D5 7
198 TAPE LED O Tape sensor output LED control 7 0 **D1 3
199 NTSC XPAL I NTSC/PAL changeover (System control. C) 7 0 **D5 3
200 TAPE END AD Tape end detection
201 EXT DET I External microphone detection (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 5
208 REC PROOF I Cassette recording inhibit signal detection
210 MSW AD Mechanism position detection
214 USB INT USB interruption
220 HP MUTE O Headphone output muting (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 4
224 SST2 (DIC PARARRIL) I Camera picture control: A/B parallel capture 7 0 **D3 2
226 VCO HI O VRP VCO control 7 0 **D2 0
232 SREEL S reel FG input
261 VIF/AIF SCK VIF/AIF serial communication clock 7 0 **D8 2
263 WIDE CONT O Wide (16:9) output control (VBI. D) 7 0 **D4 5
264 MODE REQ O Mode control communication chip selection (Cp. C) 7 0 **D5 5
265 DA SREEL O S reel FG control voltage output 7 0 **D6 7
270 REEL LED CONT O Reel FG output LED control 7 0 **D1 4
283 MODE CS Mode serial communication CS interruption
292 SHOE ON O Video light ON (Va. C) 7 0 **D3 4

2-20
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
319 CARD BUS SEL O Card bus connection selection 7 0 **D0 2
321 VIF/AIF SO O VIF/AIF serial transmission data 7 0 **D7 2
322 MODE SO O Mode control serial transmission data 7 0 **D7 0
323 SDET I S terminal detection 7 0 **D4 7
339 SHOE ID1 Shoe (microphone/light) detection
341 TAPE TOP AD Tape top detection
346 SST 1 (DIC FREEZE) I Camera picture control: Request for freezing 7 0 **D2 7
347 A MUTE O Audio muting (AIF/line out) (Audio. C) 7 0 **D2 1
348 REC MUTE O AIF3 AD data value fixed at mute level (Audio. C) 7 0 **D3 0

2-21
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

5-6-3 MODE MI-COM (IC103)

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
3 Batt A/D A/D Detection of decrease in battery voltage 7 2 **C0 A/D
4 Batt Info A/D A/D Detection of battery type 7 2 **C1 A/D
5 A/D V A/D Charge voltage detection A/D 7 2 **C2 A/D
6 A/D I A/D Charge current detection A/D 7 2 **C3 A/D
13 CassetteMemory A/D0 A/D Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 2 **C4 A/D
14 CassetteMemory A/D1 A/D Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 2 **C5 A/D
15 CassetteMemory A/D2 A/D Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 2 **C6 A/D
16 KEY AD0 A/D 7 2 **C7 A/D
17 KEY AD1 A/D 7 2 **C8 A/D
19 KEY AD2 A/D 7 2 **C9 A/D
20 KEY AD3 A/D 7 2 **CA A/D
21 Fch0 I Process mode/software debug terminal 7 2 **CB A/D
22 DC J DET I DC jack detection 7 2 **CC A/D
23 V53 FlashUpdate I V53 flash updating 7 2 **CD A/D
24 MMC DET I MMC provided/not provided 7 2 **CE A/D
25 CARD PRO I MMC protection 7 2 **CF A/D
27 VCR Power Switch I VCR mode switch 7 2 **D0 0
28 CAM Power Switch I CAMERA mode switch 7 2 **D0 1
29 T/C PW SW I Tape/card switch 7 2 **D0 2
30 V3ToM File TX I File being transferred in PC mode 7 2 **D0 3
31 Li3V Detect I Check for decrease in lithium battery voltage 7 2 **D0 4
32 Lanc Power On I LANC power-ON detection 7 2 **D0 5
33 Eject Switch I Eject switch detection 7 2 **D0 6
34 Cassette In Switch I Cassette-IN switch detection 7 2 **D0 7
36 PhotoSwitch I Memory switch full pressing detection 7 2 **D1 0
37 HarfPhotoSwitch I Memory switch halfway pressing detection 7 2 **D1 1
38 START STOP I Trigger switch 7 2 **D1 2
39 PAE/GREEN SW I PAE mode selection switch 7 2 **D1 3
40 PANEL OpenSwitch I Panel open switch detection 7 2 **D1 4
41 PANELBottom/TopSwitch I Panel bottom/top switch detection 7 2 **D1 5
42 DialCWSwitch I Dial detection 7 2 **D1 6
43 DialCCWSwitch I Dial detection 7 2 **D1 7
44 VCR POW LED O VCR LED emission control 7 2 **D2 0
45 CAM POW LED O CAMERA LED emission control 7 2 **D2 1
46 NTSC/PAL O NTSC/PAL selection 7 2 **D2 2
47 Memory Access LED O Card access LCD 7 2 **D2 3
48 CHG LED O CHARGE LED emission control 7 2 **D2 4
49 KEY LED1 O 7 2 **D2 5
50 KEY LED2 O 7 2 **D2 6
51 KEY LED3 O 7 2 **D2 7
58 OSDC CS O OSD IC chip selection 7 2 **D3 0
59 PANEL XOE O Panel serial/parallel OE 7 2 **D3 1
60 VCR Power ON O VCR power supply control 7 2 **D3 2
61 CAM ON O CAMERA CCD power supply 7 2 **D3 3
62 EVF SEN O EVFIC chip selection 7 2 **D3 4
63 PANEL-ICCS O Panel IC CS 7 2 **D3 5
64 PANEL LCK O Panel serial/parallel LCK 7 2 **D3 6

2-22
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
65 DSU 7 2 **D3 7
68 VIC3 ChipSelect O VIC3 chip selection 7 2 **D4 0
69 DIC2sk XSYSRST O DIC2sk resetting 7 2 **D4 1
70 DIC2sk Mode O DIC2sk CAM/VCR 7 2 **D4 2
71 MTOC EN O CAMERA MI-COM communication enabled 7 2 **D4 3
72 Lanc Cont O LANC power supply control 7 2 **D4 4
73 DSU 7 2 **D9 0
74 DSU 7 2 **D9 1
75 DSU 7 2 **D9 2
76 DSU 7 2 **D9 3
77 DSU 7 2 **D9 4
78 DSU 7 2 **D9 5
79 DSU 7 2 **D9 6
80 DSU 7 2 **D9 7
82 SIC REQ [Interruption] SIC communication 7 2 **DA 0
83 Reserve 1 [Interruption] SIC communication 7 2 **DA 1
84 CAM RXData I Request for CAMERA MI-COM reception 7 2 **DA 2
85 RMC Pulse In I [Interruption] Remote control signal input 7 2 **DA 3
86 DIC2sk XSYSRST Request I DIC2sk resetting request 7 2 **DA 4
87 DIC2sk FieldIndex I DIC2sk field index 7 2 **DA 5
88 V3ToM PC I PC mode selected 7 2 **DA 6
89 MTOV3 PC O PC mode enabled 7 2 **DA 7
92 Mode EEpROMCS O Mode EEPROM chip selection 7 2 **DC 0
93 EVF EEpROM CS O EVF EEPROM chip selection 7 2 **DC 1
94 PANEL-EEpROMCS O Panel EEPROM chip selection 7 2 **DC 2
95 DIC2sk Chip Select O DIC2sk chip selection 7 2 **DC 3
96 TRI O Trickle charge control 7 2 **DC 4
98 EEpROM RESET O EEPROM resetting 7 2 **DC 6
99 MIRR O Panel CSD OFF in MIRROR mode 7 2 **DC 7
101 LancOut LANC data output 7 2 **DF 0
102 LancIn LANC data input 7 2 **DF 1
103 XRESET O VIC 7 2 **DF 2
104 Cassette Memory ON O Cassette memory power supply control 7 2 **DF 3
105 Cassette Memory SDA I/O CM communication data terminal 7 2 **DF 4
106 Cassette Memory SCL O CM communication clock terminal 7 2 **DF 5
107 E3DET I [Interruption] Detection of decrease in E3V 7 2 **DF 6
115 32.768KHz 7 2 **DD 6
116 32.769KHz 7 2 **DD 7
119 SIC Reset O SIC resetting 7 2 **DB 0
120 SIC BBUSSEL O SIC BBUSSEL 7 2 **DB 1
121 SIC PSB O SIC PSB 7 2 **DB 2
122 SIC CS O SIC CS 7 2 **DB 3
123 EVF ON O EVF ON 7 2 **DB 4
124 EVF BL ON O EVF BL ON 7 2 **DB 5
125 PS O Charge power save control 7 2 **DB 6
128 VIC3 Resuest [Interruption] VIC3 communication request 7 2 **DB 7
129 VIC3 Serial Data Out VIC3 serial data output 7 2 **DD 0
(Mode to VIC3) 7 2

2-23
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
130 VIC3 Serial Data In VIC3 serial data input 7 2 **DD 1
(VIC3 to Mode) 7 2
131 VIC3 Serial Clock VIC3 serial clock output 7 2 **DD 2
132 Camera/DIC2sk Camera/DIC2sk serial data 7 2
Serial Data Out 7 2 **DD 3
(Mode to Camera) 7 2
133 Camra Serial Data IN Camera serial data input 7 2 **DD 4
(Camera to Mode) 7 2
134 Camera/DIC2sk Camera/DIC2sk serial clock 7 2 **DD 5
Serial Clock 7 2
135 SerialOut SIC 7 2 **DE 0
136 SerialIn SIC 7 2 **DE 1
137 SerialClock SIC 7 2 **DE 2
138 SerialOut OSDC/EEPROM/EVFIC/LOC 7 2 **DE 3
139 SerialIn EEPROM 7 2 **DE 4
140 SerialClock OSDC/EEPROM/EVFIC/LOC 7 2 **DE 5
142 CTOM EN [Interruption] Camera communication request 7 2 **DE 7

2-24
 CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

CONTETNS
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-1
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-1
1-2 List of Supplies ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-1
2. Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
2-1 Setting A -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
2-2 Setting B -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-3
3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
4. Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
4-1 General ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
4-2 Service Mode Indications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-5
5. Description of Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-6
5-1 Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-6
5-2 Mechanical Error Indications -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-7
5-3 Camera Special Commands ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-8
5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-9
5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-9
5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-9
6. Service Hints ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-10
6-2 Location of Main Elements --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-11
6-3 Current Consumption Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-12
7. Trouble Shooting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-13
7-1 Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-13
7-2 Camera Picture Faulty --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-14
7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-15
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies

1-1 List of Maintenance Tools

Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/NT SC) DY9-1321-000 Recorder electrical adjustment
Alignment T ape (tracking) DY9-1345-000 Running adjustment DMC II
Cassette T orque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC II
Cleaning T ape (normal) – Commercially available DMC II
DV Cleaning T ape (hard) DY9-1359-000 Head cleaning DMC II
Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment DMC II
Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Color Viewer 5600° K for 220V DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220V)
Color Viewer 5600° K for 240V DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240V)
Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement
Filter, CCA W12ø46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Remote Commander RM-95 DY9-1349-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment

1-2 List of Supplies

Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Diamond oil/Hydro-Fluid NT -68 DY9-3010-00 Lubrication DMC II
T o be locally
purchased in USA
Grease GB-12 DY9-3022-000 Lubrication DMC II
Grease FLOIL C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication DMC II
Hanarl KS-50 DY9-3047-000 Lubrication DMC II
Logenest Lambda A-74 CY9-8102-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GE-C9 CY9-8043-000 Lubrication Lens
Hanarl KS-50 DY9-3047-000 Lubrication Cover
Dia Bond No. 1663G CY9-8129-000 Adhesive LCD
Sponge (W × H × T : 300mm × 200mm × 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating
/sound absorbing material
Adhesive T ape, No.354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
(W × L × T : 9mm × 50m × 0.15mm, UL type)
Adhesive T ape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose
(W × L × T : 10mm × 50m × 0.16mm, UL type) double-side-coated adhesive tape
Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm × 250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material

3-1
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

2. Setting
(1) Adjustments other than DMC-II : Perform adjustments in the product state.
(2) Tracking adjustment (DMC-II) and Envelope check : Perform them with the Setting A.
(3) Adjustments related to DMC-II other than Tracking adjustment, tape path system check and tape path system cleaning : Perform
them with the Setting B.

2-1 Setting A
(1) Remove the LITHIUM BATTERY COVER
(2) Observe the PB-RF signal output from the PB-RF signal check pad.

LITHIUM BATT.
COVER

RB-RF

Fig. 3-1

Tracking adjustment)
(1) Remove the CASSETTE COVER referring to Fig. 3-2 (a).
(2) When the posts are going to be adjusted, eject and remove the cassette once and perform the prospective adjustment as shown in
Fig. 3-2 (b).
(3) Repeat the observation of the PB-RF waveform and the prospective adjustment until fluctuation of envelope is re-moved.
Note : When the tracking adjustment is going to be performed, refer to Chapter 2-7 on page 4-52 : Tape Path Adjust-
ment.

(a) (b)

CASSETTE COVER ×2 ADJUSTMENT DRIVER

×2

Fig. 3-2

3-2
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

2-2 Setting B
(1) Remove the FRONT COVER, REAR COVER, LEFT COVER UNIT and RIGHT COVER UNIT referring to Chapter 4-1: Disas-
sembling and Reassembling.
Note 1 : Connect the necessary cables referring to Fig. 3-3.
Note 2 : Observe the PB-RF signal in the same manners as in the setting A.

MONITOR TV

LANC REMOTE
COMMANDER RM-95
(DY9-1349-000)

JACK1 P.C.B.

CN802
LEFT COVER UNIT MAIN P.C.B. JACK2 P.C.B.
CN801
MAIN P.C.B. JACK1 P.C.B.
REAR COVER UNIT

CN1002
PCC P.C.B.
JACK2 P.C.B. JACK2 P.C.B.

CA-560

CN101
MAIN P.C.B. LI P.C.B.

Fig. 3-3

3-3
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000)

(1) Connect the LANC terminal.
(2) To set up the service mode, turn the “HOLD SW” to the HOLD
position. When the “HOLD SW” is returned to its home 1. HOLD SW 2. PAGE +
6
position, the product is controlled using its own functions.
(3) LCD indications in the service mode: *:**:**
4) PAGE is indicated while the FOCUS KEY is held down. 4 5 8 7
5) BANK is indicated. 10. MODE
11. PAGE
6) MODE is indicated. SELECT
DISPLAY
WR when the BATT mark is presented. 4. BANK - 3. BANK +
7) ADDR is indicated.
12. EJECT
8) DT is indicated (hexadecimal). 9. STORE
(4) The following table shows the key functions available in the 6. ADDRESS - 5. ADDRESS +
service mode. 7. DATA +
8. DATA -

Fig. 3-4

< Key Functions in Service Mode >

No. Key name (in service mode) Function Key name (in normal state)
1 HOLD T ransition to service mode by setting to the HOLD HOLD
position
2 PAGE + PAGE is incremented by one. ST ART /ST OP
3 BANK + BANK is incremented by one. EDIT SEARCH +
4 BANK - BANK is decremented by one. EDIT SEARCH -
5 ADDRESS + ADDRESS is incremented by one. FF
6 ADDRESS - ADDRESS is decremented by one. REW
7 DAT A + DAT A is incremented by one. PLAY
8 DAT A - DAT A is decremented by one. ST OP
9 ST ORE Confirmation/writing of DAT A PAUSE
10 MODE SELECT RD/WR mode selection REC REVIEW
11 PAGE DISPLAY PAGE is indicated on LED of remote controller. FOCUS
12 EJECT EJECT operation is performed. COUNT ER RESET

3-4
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

4. Service Modes

4-1 General
(1) The service modes are of a command input type using LANC communication.
(2) In the command-input-type service mode, operation mode transition in the main unit can be performed using the keys equipped on
it. Also, by returning the HOLD SW to the normal mode position, the operation mode transition on the main unit can be pefrormed
with the service remote controller.
(3) In the command-input-type service mode, the mechanism error, dew, insufficiency of power and other safety detecting functions are
ineffective.
(4) In the command-input-type service mode, the LCD mirror function is ineffective.

4-2 Service Mode Indications

Shown below are the on-screen indications to be given in the service modes.
1) Indicates that the service mode is set up (“SERV”).
2) Indicates which block is subjected to the command (“FR”, “CAM”, “MODE” etc.).
3) Indicates a message for a special command (“DATA”, “SUB” etc.).
4) PG : Indicates the PAGE being selected (“4” to “7”).
5) BK : Indicates the BANK being selected (“0” to “7”).
6) MD : Indicates the MODE being selected (RD/WR).
7) ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS being selected in hexadecimal (**00 to **FF, 0000 to FFFF).
8) DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in hexadecimal (00 to FF).
9) DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in binary (********), except for some special functions.
10) ST : Indicates the STATUS in progress (“OK”,“NG”, “BUSY” etc.).
11) Indicates an absolute track number.
12) E0 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH0 (low channel) head.
13) E1 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH1 (high channel) head.
14) Indicates a version number of the FR microcomputer.
15) Indicates a version number of the MODE microcomputer.
16) Indicates a version number of the CAMERA microcomputer.
17) Indicates the state of the mechanism. (“POPUP”, “STBY”, “LOAD1”, “LOAD2”, “STOP”, “PLAY”)
18) Indicates a firmware version for MMC control. (MC model only)

S ERV ( 2 )( 3 ) S TO P
1 0 : 0 0 : 00 : 00
( 11 )
( 17 )
PG B K MD ADDR D T S T
(4 )( 5)( 6 )( 7 )( 8 )( 10)
E 0 ( 12 ) E1 ( 13 ) ( 9 )
CD ( 18 )
MA ( 14 )
MD ( 15 )
CA ( 16 )

Fig. 3-5

3-5
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

5. Description of Service Modes

5-1 Error Rate

<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.
(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure
in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.

<How to read a VIDEO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-
cated in exponential representation. Low ch. High ch.
EO 2 5 E1
Example) ‘25’ is indicated:
Error rate = 2×10 -5
-5
2 × 10

Fig. 3-6

<How to read an AUDIO error rate>

To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the
table below. Low ch. High ch.
The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync AO 2 3 A1
blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.
(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)

Example) ‘23’is indicated:

2 3 (hexadecimal)

Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35

In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan-

nels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :
(2 ×16)+ 3 = 35 (decimal)
Error rate =28H or less
(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less) Fig. 3-7

Important
After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation

ERROR RAT E PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 6 4 WR --1D 00 Product setting
2) Set DT to 03. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 03 Audio error rate indication
Reference) Product setting can be selected by resetting DT to 00. T hus, the Audio+Video error rate is indicated.

3-6
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

5-2 Mechanical Error Indications

<Generals>
(1) When the camcorder is stopped upon detection of a mechanical error, the POWER LED indicator blinks and the message “EJECT
CASSETTE”appears on screen. At this step, the error condition can be checked in the service mode.
(2) A mechanical error indication is given in either one of the following two manners: indication of data held only by the main battery,
and indication of data backed up by the Lithium 3V. Referring to the table shown below, select an indication mode.
(3) Data backed up by the Lithium 3V can be reset at step 3.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
MECH. ERROR PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --01 -- Error data held only in the POWER-ON
state is indicated.
2 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --02 -- Error data backed up by the EEPROM is
indicated.
3 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 WR --02 00
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of backup data resetting

<Indication of error data held only by the main battery>

PG B K MD ADDR D T S T E: T A P E E N D
7 2 RD - - 01 - - B: T A P E T O P
E BDC S T L D D: D R U M E R R O R
C: C A P S T A N E R R O R
S:S-REEL ERROR
T:T-REEL ERROR
Relevant error indication is highlighted.
L:LOADING MTR ERROR
D: D E W E R R O R

Fig. 3-8

<Indication of error data backed up by Lithium 3V>

PG B K MD ADDR D T S T D: D R U M E R R O R
7 2 RD - -02 - - C: C A P S T A N E R R O R
* * DC S T L D S:S-REEL ERROR
T:T-REEL ERROR
L:LOADING MTR ERROR
Rele v a n t e rro r i n d i c a ti o n i s h i ghl i ghted. D: D E W E R R O R

Fig. 3-9

3-7
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

5-3 Camera Special Commands

<Generals>
(1) The camera special commands are available for operation check.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, make preparation, and then use any camera special commands as required.
(3) All the settings are reset when the STORE key is pressed in the “WR”mode at a relevant item.
Also, all commands are reset by turning the power off and on again.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CAM SPECIAL COMMAND PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
Preparation 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 33 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of high address "33" setting
WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3300 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB is set.
WB LOCK 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3301 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB is locked.
WB T URBO 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3302 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB high-speed setting mode
WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3303 -- WAIT
OUT DOOR 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Outdoor white balance mode
WB INDOOR 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3304 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Indoor white balance mode
IRIS OPEN 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3305 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK T he iris is opened forcibly.
IRIS CLOSE 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3306 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK T he iris is closed forcibly.
AGC MAX 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3307 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK A value of AGC gain is maximized.
AGC MIN 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3308 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK A value of AGC gain is minimized.
White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330A -- WAIT
(DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Output a white 100% signal for DIC output.
White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330B -- WAIT
(DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Output a white 50% signal for DIC output.
White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330C -- WAIT
(DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK DIC output, white
(By charging the DT of
"PG : 5, BK : 2, AD : 181C",
the brightness can be changed arbitrary.
White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330D -- WAIT
(FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Output a white 100% signal for FIC output.
White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330E -- WAIT
(FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Output a white 50% signal for FIC output.
White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330F -- WAIT
(FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK FIC output, white
(By charging the DT of
"PG : 5, BK : 2, AD : 181C",
the brightness can be changed arbitrary.

3-8
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting

<Generals>
(1) Setting the address according to the table below allows to check whether the lens resetting is ended or not.
(2) The 1st digit of binary number indication (Fig. 3-4 9 ) of data is for zoom, and the 2nd for focus resetting. Resetting is ended if 1
is indicated.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
LENS RESET PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
PREPARAT ION 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 1C WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of high address"1C" setting
LENS RESET Set to status shown on right and 5 0 RD 1C1C -- WAIT
check the binary number
indication data.

5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches

<Generals>
(1) In the service mode, the terminals of the MAIN and SUB microcomputer can be checked. Thereby, it is allowed to check key-
related operations and key-microcomputer connections in the product state.
(2) The addresses of the microcomputer terminals for checking are indicated in the “Remarks” column in the I/O port table (p. 2-17 to p. 2-
24). Note that since serial communication data signals are not synchronous with the LANC communication cycle (field) in the service
mode, operations related to these signals are not indicated accurately. So, use indications for these signals just as reference data.
(3) The following explanations are provided for the data content which seem rather complicated. For other than below, use the
addresses shown in the “Remarks” column of the I/O port table.
(4) When carrying out functional checks, select the RD mode.

5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key

(1) On the MAIN and SUB microcomputers, the terminals shown in Fig. 3-10 are A/D input ports. Key and/or mode is detected by
means of the A/D-converted voltage.

MI-COM Pin No. NAME PG BK ADDR A/D DATA (00~FF)

MODE 17 KEY A/D 0 7 2 C7

(00~2C) (2D~67) (68~A7) (A8~FF)
DIGITAL ON/OFF MENU --
EFFECT

REC
MODE 18 KEY A/D 1 7 2 C8 MIX FOCUS --
SERCH +

7 2 DATA REC AE
MODE 19 KEY A/D 2 C9 --
CODE SERCH - SHIFT
EXECUTE
MODE 20 KEY A/D 3 7 2 C10 -- -- --
(DIAL)
Not yet
MODE 22 DC JACK DET. 7 2 CC DC JACK Connected
connected
MEMORY Not yet
MODE 24 7 2 CE Connected MEMORY CARD
CARD DET. connected
CARD
MODE 25 7 2 CF UNLOCK SD CARD LOCK
PROTECT

MODE 6 A/D I 7 2 C3 Charging current (unable to measure)

MODE 5 A/D V 7 2 C2 Charging voltage (unable to measure)

BATT. 7 2 (00~33) (34~65) (66~99) (9A~CD) (CE~FF)

MODE 4 C1 Without battery BP-535 BP-522 BP-511/512 BP-508
INFO A/D

MODE 3 BATT A/D 7 2 C0 Voltage of main power supply

The parenthesized values indicate theoretical values, from which actual values may deviate to some extent.

Fig .3-10

3-9
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

6. Service Hints

6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards

The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.

POWER KEY UNIT

ZOOM KEY UNIT
CVF P.C.B.

JACK2 P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B.
LI P.C.B.

EJECT P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B.

JACK1 P.C.B.

PPC P.C.B.
SJ FPC

LCD P.C.B.

Fig.3-11

3-10
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

6-2 Location of Main Elements

MAIN P.C.B.
IC801 IC2303 IC103 IC101
AUDIO IF SDRAM (64M) MODE MI-COM. EEPROM

IC2100 IC2900 IC1302 IC1303 IC102

VIF2 CG CAM MI-COM EEPROM LANC IF

IC100 IC301 IC2301 IC2000 IC2300 IC802

E3 REG. MOTOR DRIVE VIC3 VRP2 8M FLASH SP DRIVER

IC3501
CMOS
IC4000 SWITCH
4M FLASH
IC3500
USB DRIVER

IC4001 IC4002 IC4010 IC1100 IC1101

V53 SDRAM (16M) SIC DIC2S SDRAM

LI P.C.B. LCD P.C.B. IC901

EEPROM

IC902
D/A

IC903
PB RF LCD DRIVE
(CHECK PAD)

Fig. 3-12

3-11
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

PCC P.C.B.
IC1001 IC1000 IC1501 IC1502 IC1503 IC1206 IC1202
CDS/AGC/AD TG CVF DRIVE CMOS SWITCH EEPROM NAND MOTOR DRIVE

IC1201
DA
IC1003
AND

IC1002
AMP

FU3200
FU3201
FU3204 FUSE IC3202 IC3201 IC3200
FU3203
FUSE FU3202 OP AMP CHARGE DC/DC CONV

JACK2 P.C.B.
IC1602
GYRO (Y)

IC1603
CMOS
SWITCH

IC1601
GYRO (P)

Fig. 3-13

6-3 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.

Measurement condition : Product status, camera auto mode(AF,IS OFF), LCD ON (Approx. 0.1A each smaller in case of CVF)
Preset voltage : 7.4V

POWER SW MODE Current consumption (A)

CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.54
REC 0.59
VCR STOP 0.43
PLAY 0.54
POWER OFF 0.8 (mA)

3-12
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

7. Trouble Shooting
To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.

7-1 Power Supply

<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.

Main power is connected. → UNREG is supplied to the MAIN P.C.B. → MODE microcomputer starts up. → MODE microcomputer
outputs VCR ON “H” signal, CAM ON “H” singal. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. → Establishes commu-
nication with the FR microcomputer. → FR microcomputer initializes recorder mechanical chassis. → Enters the standby mode upon
completion of initialization.

Then the power supply starts up in the followinEg sequence.

Power mode switch is operated. → Upon receipt of command, MODE microcomputer outputs VCR ON “H” signal, CAM ON “H”
singal. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. → Each microcomputer (FR, CAMERA) starts up to implement system
control.

<Check Points>
1) Key Inputs
Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode.
2) Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication
If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indi-
cated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.
3) Error in Mechanism (P. 3-7)
If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.
At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in the
SERVICE mode.
4) VCR ON “H”, CAM ON “H” (control signal from MODE microcomputer) Outputs
Check the output of control signal by the LANC remote controller.
5) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
Check the continuations of fuses FU 3200, 3201, 3202, 3203, 3204 on PCC P.C.B. If any fuse is faulty, replace it and check the
current consumption.
6) Replace the PCC P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.

3-13
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

7-2 Camera Picture Faulty

<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.
CCD → PCC P.C.B. → MAIN P.C.B. (DIC IC → SIC → VIC→VIF) → JACK1 P.C.B.

<Check Points>
1) Lens Resetting (P. 3-9)
If the camera picture is not displayed, check it in the service mode. If NG, check the lens.
2) Blue Back Output
If the blue-back is confirmed, it can be judged that the signal line subsequent to the VIC are normal.
3) Check of white 100% (FIC or DIC) output (P. 3-8)
The white 100% (FIC or DIC) signal is generated by the DIC2S mounted on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, check whether
the white 100% (FIC or DIC) signal is generated normally or not. If its output is normal, the signal line subsequent to the DIC2S
would be normal.
4) CCD Output
The CCD output signal is sampled by the CDS/AGC/AD IC. Check this signal condition.
5) Camera Special Command (P. 3-8)
Check the operations of White Balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the SERVICE mode.

3-14
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS

7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture

<Hints>
In DV format, the deterioration of picture quality appears on the screen as a block noise. This failure is occurred when the picture
information (in block unit) exceeds a limit of processing performance of error correction and the previous picture information is used for
compensation.
Normally, if an error rate is worsened considerably by the deterioration of tape quality or head output, the symptom appears.
For this reason, when you check the playback picture, check the error rate.

<Check Points>
1) Deterioration of Tape Quality
Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.
2) Error Rate (P. 3-6)
In the service mode, check an error rate of self-recording/LP playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 × 10-5.
In case of NG, take the following procedure.

(1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment.

(2) Run a cleaning tape.
Either a normal cleaning tape (commercially available) or a hard cleaning tape (DY9-1359-000) may be used.

[Playback time]
Normal cleaning tape (commercially available) : Follow the instructions indicated for the cleaning tape.
Hard cleaning tape (DY9-1359-000) : After replacement of the drum unit → 25 seconds
For cleaning → 10 seconds per time, Up to three times

(3) Check the error rate again.

If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened with
alcohol.
* Take care not to damage the head.
* Do not touch the head with bare hand.
(4) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use
a tape (must be Panasonic LP tape) which has been purchased at a different time. The error rate may become worse due to
inconsistent quality or aging of the tape.
(5) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit.
(6) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.

3-15
 CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

CONTENS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-2 Separation of Front Cover Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
1-3 Separation of Accessory Shoe ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3
1-4 Separation of Right Cover Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4
1-5 Separation of Cassette Lock Ass'y -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
1-6 Separation of Recorder and Camera Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-6
1-7 Separation of Camera Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-8
1-8 Separation of PCC P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-9
1-9 Separation of SJ FPC Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-10
1-10 Separation of MAIN P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11
1-11 Separation of Recorder Holder ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-12
1-12 Disassembly of Front Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-13
1-13 Separation of RB Cover and Open Knob ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-14
1-14 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-15
1-15 Disassembly of LCD Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-16
1-16 Separation of LCD Hinge Ass'y -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-17
1-17 Separation of JACK2 P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-18
1-18 Separation of Rear Cover Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-19
1-19 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-20
1-20 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-21
1-21 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-22
1-22 Separation of CVF Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-23
1-23 Disassembly of Rear Cover 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-24
1-24 Disassembly of Rear Cover 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-25
1-25 Disassembly of Rear Cover 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-26
1-26 Disassembly of CVF Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-27
1-27 Disassembly of CVF Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28
1-28 Disassembly of CVF Unit 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29
1-29 Disassembly of CVF Unit 4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30
1-30 Disassembly of Camera Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-31
1-31 CCD Ass'y --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-32
1-32 Lens Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-33
1-33 List of Screws ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34
1-34 List of Disassembly Photos -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-35
2. Adjustment Procedures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-37
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-37
2-2 AF Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-38
2-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-38
2-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-39
2-3 IS Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-40
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-40
2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-40
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-41
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-42
2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-42
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-42
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-43
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-43
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-43
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-44
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-45
2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-45
2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-46
2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-48
2-6-1 Y LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-48
2-6-2 C LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-49
2-6-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E) ---------------------------- 4-49
2-6-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-50
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-50
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-50
2-6-7 LCD P.C.B. Setting for Destination ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-51
2-7 Tape Path Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-52
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1. Disassembling and Reassembling

Notes :
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.
(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure
diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.
⋅ Lateral engaging connector
(The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)
: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side)
∗ : Contacts are positioned upward.
⋅ Lengthwise engaging connector
(The instructions are given only in the boards interconnection diagram.)
Indicated by →. Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts.
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8012-000)

1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.
(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.

: MAIN FLOW
START
: SUB FLOW
: MAIN UNIT
1-2 Front Cover Unit 1-12 Mic Ass’y

1-3 Accessory Shoe

1-4 Right Cover Unit 1-14 LCD Unit 1-14 LCD P.C.B.

1-4 JACK1 P.C.B. 1-15 Hinge Ass’y

1-5 Cassette Lock Ass’y 1-31 CCD P.C.B.

1-6 Recorder, Camera Unit 1-7 Camera Unit 1-32 Lens Unit

1-17 JACK2 P.C.B. 1-7 Recorder Unit 1-8 PCC P.C.B.

1-18 Rear Cover Unit 1-23 LI P.C.B. 1-9 SJ FPC Unit

1-24 Power Key Ass’y 1-10 MAIN P.C.B.

1-19 Left Cover Unit 1-19 Speaker Ass’y 1-11 Recorder Holder

1-19 EJECT P.C.B. 1-11 DMC II

1-19 Zoom Photo Key Ass’y

1-21 Cassette Arm Ass’y

1-26 CVF Unit 1-29 CVF P.C.B.

4-1
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-2 Separation of Front Cover Unit

(1) Open the AV Jack Cover, S Jack Cover and Cassette Cover. Then, remove seven screws (a × 5, b × 1, c × 1).
(2) Remove one screw (a × 1) and the CN701 Connector. Then, detach the Front Cover Unit.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Arrange the GND Wire so that it will not come into contact with the Microphone Jack. (Do not run the GND wire over the GYRO
sensor.)
(2) When attaching the Front Cover, take slack out of the cables. For this purpose, twist the cables one turn as illustrated, and then
attach the Front Cover while taking care not to pinch lead wires with it.

(1) - a

(2) - a

Front Cover Unit

(2) AV Jack Cover

Cassette Cover

CN701 S Jack Cover

(1)
(1) - b
(1) - a
(1)
a b c
3mm 5.5mm 4mm
(1)
Metal Metal
M1.7 Black (1) - a
M1.7 M1.7
Self Tap (1) - c (1) - a

Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)

JACK1 P.C.B.

GND Wire One turn

MIC JACK

Hook

Fold

Fig. 4-1

4-2
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-3 Separation of Accessory Shoe

(1) Remove four screws (d × 4), and demount the Accessory Shoe.

(1) - d

Accessory Shoe

(1)

d
5mm
Metal
M1.7
Flat Head Screw

Fig. 4-2

4-3
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-4 Separation of Right Cover Unit

(1) Remove one screw (a × 1), disconnect the CN4 connector, and demount the JACK1 P.C.B.
(2) Open the SD Cover, remove five screws (a × 1, c × 2, e × 2, l× 2).
(3) Remove the Right Cover Unit while sliding it toward front, then remove the CN100, CN102 and CN1502 with lifted it up.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When reassembling the Right Cover Unit, insert it from the rear side as illustrated. Invert the LCD to twist the cable one turn so that
it will not be pinched between surrounding parts.

DM-MV500i E,DM-MV510 E,
(2) - c DM-MV500 E,DM-MV490 E
Only

CN102 CN100

(3)

(2) - l
JACK1 P.C.B. SD Cover

(1) (2) - e
(2)
(1) - a Right Cover Unit
DM-MV550i E
DM-MV530i E
Only
(2) - a
(1) (3)
(3)
CN4 (3) CN1502

(2) - c

Note on Reassembling (1)

l a
4mm 3mm
Black Metal
M1.7 M1.7
Rotation Self Tap
c
4mm
Metal
LCD OPEN M1.7
Knob
e
4.5mm
Black
M1.7
Self Tap

Fig. 4-3

4-4
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-5 Separation of Cassette Lock Ass'y

(1) Pull part A of the Cassette Lock Ass'y frontward to unlock it, and open the Cassette Cover.
(2) Remove three screws (a × 1, c × 2), and demount the Cassette Lock Ass'y.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When mounting the Cassette Lock Ass'y, take care not to pinch the cable with Claw part B.
(2) Arrange the CN3200 connector wiring as illustrated.

< Instruction for Supply >

Sectional face of Cassette Lock Ass’y Claw : HANAL KS-50M (DY9-3047-000)

Instruction for Supply

Hanal KS-50M

Cassette Cover

Cassette Lock Ass’y

(2)

(1) a c
(2) - c
3mm 4mm
(2) - a A Metal Metal
(1) M1.7 M1.7
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)
MAIN P.C.B.

CN3200 CN3200
Do not run the
B wiring over the LED.
PCC
P.C.B. Run the wiring
under the LED.
Cassette Lock Ass’y

Fig. 4-5

4-5
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-6 Separation of Recorder and Camera Unit

(1) Disconnect the CN1601 connector, detach the Lithium Battery Cover, and remove two screws (a × 2).
(2) Remove the UL tape, and disconnect the connectors CN101, CN1501, CN3200 and CN3201. Set the Cassette Cover to open-state.
(3) Pull a concave in the figure lightly. Then, while pushing it downward, remove the Recorder and Camera Unit horizontally.

(1) - a Lithium Battery

(1) (1) - a

CN1501

CN1601
(2)
(2)
(1) CN101
(2)

CN3200 (2)
(1) - a
(2)
UL Tape
(2)
(3) CN3201
a
3mm
Metal
M1.7

Fig. 4-5

4-6
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Open the Cassette Cover.
(2) Remount the recorder and Camera Unit from the rear part in a tilted fashion, and push in the front part. At the time of remounting,
be sure to observe the following instructions:
1 Set part A of the rear of the Recorder Unit on the back of part B of the Left Cover.
2 Check that screw positions are aligned on parts C and D.
3 Take care not to pinch or damage the Flexible Cable.
4 Take care not to flaw the Drum.
(3) As to wiring connections, observe the following instructions:
1 Insert the JACK2-PCC Cable into the CN3201 of PCC P.C.B. completely.
(Be careful not to mistake the CN3201 for the CN701 on the MAIN P.C.B.)
2 Insert the JACK2-MAIN FPC under the PCC P.C.B.
3 Secure the CVF-PCC P.C.B. to the PCC P.C.B. with the UL Tape.

(2)-1
A

(2)-2 D

(1)
(2)

(2)

CVF-PCC FPC

CN701

CN1601 Run under the

PCC P.C.B.
JACK2-MAIN FPC

PCC P.C.B.
(2)-2 UL TAPE
CN3201 (20 × 40)
JACK2-PCC Cable
C

Fig. 4-6

4-7
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-7 Separation of Camera Unit

(1) Remove two screws (f × 2), disconnect the CN1000, CN1002 and CN1201 connectors, and demount the Camera Unit.

(1) - f

Camera Unit

(1) - f (1)

(1)

CN1000

f
CN1201
2.5mm
Metal CN1002
M1.7

Fig. 4-7

4-8
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-8 Separation of PCC P.C.B.

(1) Remove one screw (f × 1). Then, demount the PCC P.C.B. while disconnecting the CN1001 and CN1301 (B to B) connectors.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Set the PCC P.C.B. at parts A and B of the Recorder Holder, and make positional alignment using screw holes on part C. Insert the
PCC P.C.B. while taking care not to damage the B-to-B connector.

CN1301
(B to B)

PPC P.C.B.

(1) CN1001
(B to B)

Note on Reassembling (1)

A B

(1) - f

f
2.5mm
Metal
C M1.7

Fig. 4-8

4-9
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-9 Separation of SJ FPC Unit

(1) Remove one screw (f × 1), and disconnect the CN2100 connector. Then, demount the SJ FPC Unit and Cushion.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) The thickness of part A will increase when the Cushion is attached to the SJ FPC Unit. In attachment of the Cushion, align part A
with part B (notch) on the back of the Front Cover.

SJ FPC Unit f
2.5mm
(1) - f
Metal
M1.7
(1) Note on Reassembling
CN2100 Back of the Front Cover

Cushion

B A

Fig. 4-9

4-10
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-10 Separation of MAIN P.C.B.

(1) Remove one screw (f × 1), and demount the HA Shield.
(2) Remove two screws (f × 2), and disconnect the connectors CN301, CN302, CN303, CN304 and CN2000. Then, demount the
MAIN P.C.B.
(Note) The Flexible Cable having the CN304 should be disconnected on the MAIN P.C.B. side (to protect the DMC II
side connector).
(3) Remove the cushion.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When mounting the HA Shield, insert the Claw as illustrated.
(2) Attach the cushion as illustrated.

Note on Reassembling (1)

HA Shield

Insert
MAIN P.C.B.

(2)
MAIN P.C.B.
CN303

CN304
(3)
CN302
Cushion
(2)
CN301
HA Shield

CN2000 (1) - f
(1)

Note on Reassembling (2)

(2) - f

f
2.5mm
Take care not to Metal
leave it on the LED. M1.7

Fig. 4-10

4-11
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-11 Separation of Recorder Holder

(1) Remove the Cushion.
(2) Remove three screws (g × 3), and detach the Recorder Holder, Rubber vibration isolators, and Spring.
(3) Remove on screw (f × 1), and detach the Capstan Cover.
(4) Demount the DMC FPC ass'y (B to B).
(Note) When placing the DMC II mechanical unit with the Recorder Holder removed, be sure to position the cassette
compartment on the lower side. (If the gear equipped on the rear of the Main Chassis faces down, it could be
damaged.)

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When mounting the Recorder Holder, make sure that the Rubber vibration isolators are attached at three positions.
(2) Arrange the position of the Flexible Cable as illustrated.
(3) Attach the cushion as illustrated.
(4) When using the service-part rubber vibration insulators, apply KS-50M (DY9-3047-000) to its entire surface.

DMC ⋅ Mecha Unit (4) Note on Reassembling (3)

Align with this line.

DMC FPC Ass’y

(2) Rubber
Spring

(2) - g
(1) Capstan Cover
Rubber
(3)
Recorder Holder
(3) - f
f g Rubber
2.5mm 3.4mm
(2) - g
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.4 Cushion
Stepped Screw

Note on Reassembling (2) Caution

UL Tape

Set the side of cassette

compartment downward.

Set the drum FPC under the Recorder

Holder Arm.

Fig. 4-11
4-12
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-12 Disassembly of Front Cover

(1) Remove the Cushion 1.
(2) Remove two screws (e × 1, m × 1), and demount the Microphone Ass'y, Microphone Rubber Part, Microphone Holder, Cushion 2
and GND Wire.
(3) Detach the AV JACK Cover, and S JACK Cover.
(4) Remove three screws (e × 3), and detach the Lens Cover.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) The inclination of the GND Wire should be within a range of 45°.
(2) For the Microphone Ass'y Cable, provide wiring arrangement as shown below.
(3) Attach the Cushions 1 and 2 as illustrated.

Cushion 1
(2) - e

AV JACK Cover
(4) - e (1)
(2)

(3)

Red ⋅ Black
Mic Holder
Cushion 2
(2)
(4) Mic Rubber
White ⋅ Black
Mic Ass’y
(2)
(2) - m Note on Reassembling (1)
Lens Cover

(3) GND Wire

GND
Note on Reassembling (3) Wire
S JACK Cover

Mic Holder
Cushion 1
Range of 45°

Note on Reassembling (2)

e m
2mm Cushion 2
4.5mm
Metal
Black M1.7
M1.7
Mic Rubber
Self Tap

Fig. 4-12

4-13
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-13 Separation of RB Cover and Open Knob

(1) Remove one screw (h × 1), and detach the RB Cover.
(2) Detach the open knob.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Insert the part-A claw. While shifting it rightward, insert the part-B claw.

(1) - h

h
(2) 4.5mm
RB Cover
(1) Metal
M1.7
Open Knob Self Tap

Note on Reassembling (1)

B
A

RB Cover

Fig. 4-13

4-14
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-14 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1

(1) Open the LCD Unit, and remove three screws (i × 3).
(2) Rotate the LCD Unit, remove two screws (i × 2), and detach the LCD Top Cover.
(3) Disconnect the CN901 and CN902 Connectors, and demount the LCD Unit.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Attach the LCD Top Cover after inserting the claw A.

CN901

(1)

LCD Unit

Hinge
(3) (3)

(1) - i
CN902
(2)
(2)

(1) - i

LCD
Top Cover

Note on Reassembling (1)

(2)
2
Claw A
i (2) - i
3.5mm
Metal
M1.7

Fig. 4-14

4-15
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-15 Disassembly of LCD Unit 2

(1) Detach the LCD Bottom Cover and Bottom Cover Sheet.
(2) Remove the solder parts A and B. Disconnect the CN903 connector, remove one screw (f × 1), and demount the LCD P.C.B.
(3) Remove the LCD Ass'y from the Back-Light Ass'y.
(Note) The LCD Unit can be disassembled without having to remove the Light Cover Unit.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) In reassembling, take care not to fold or bend the Bottom Cover Sheet.
(2) For the Back-Light Ass'y Cable, provide wiring arrangement as shown below. After soldering, secure the cable with bond.

< Instruction for Supply >

For securing the Back-Light Ass'y cable: DIA BOND 1663G

LCD Bottom Cover

Bottom Cover Sheet (1)

LCD Holder (1)

LCD Ass’y
LCD Sheet

Back Light
Ass’y
(3)
Solder A
LCD P.C.B. Solder B

f
2.5mm
(2) Metal
CN903 M1.7
(2) Note on Reassembling (2)
Bond applying Position
DIA Bond Solder A Solder B DIA Bond

(2) - f

CN903

Fig. 4-15

4-16
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-16 Separation of LCD Hinge Ass'y

(1) Remove the Cushion, and disconnect the CN3.
(2) Remove four screws (h × 3, j × 1), and demount the LCD Hinge Ass'y.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Attach the Cushion as illustrated.
(Note) Insert the CN3 cable under the Cushion.
(2) When using the Right Cover Ass'y supplied as a service part, attach the UL Tape as illustrated.

Cushion

(2) - j

(1)

CN3
(1)

LCD Hinge Ass’y

(2)
Note on Reassembling (1), (2)
UL Tape
(9 ×15)
8.65 ± 1.0 (2) - h

Cushion
CN3

h j
4.5mm 6.5mm
Hole contacting Attach the absorber in alignment Metal
Metal
position with the edge of the concave shape. M1.7
M1.7
Allowance for misalignment : ± 1.0 Self Tap

Fig. 4-16

4-17
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-17 Separation of JACK2 P.C.B.

(1) Remove two screws (a × 2), disconnect the CN604 and CN1603 connectors, and demount the JACK2 P.C.B.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) For the JACK2 P.C.B., provide wiring arrangement as shown below.
(2) When securing the JACK2 P.C.B. with two screws be careful not to pinch the cables between the P.C.B. and contact part of Cassette
Arm Ass’y

JACK2 P.C.B.
(1) - a
CN1604 (1)

(1)

Note on Reassembling (1), (2)

CN1603 Cassette Arm Ass’y
EJECT P.C.B.
(1)

CN1604
(1) - a
EJECT P.C.B.

JACK2 P.C.B.
a JACK2-PCC
3mm Cable
Metal Cassette Arm
M1.7 Ass’y
CN1603

Fig. 4-17

4-18
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-18 Separation of Rear Cover Unit

(1) Detach the Hand Strap from the Left Cover Unit.
(2) Turn up the CVF, remove two screws (b x 2) and the Strap Holder.
(3) Remove two screws (a × 1, e × 1), disconnect the connector CN407, and demount the Rear Cover Unit.
(Note) Be sure remove screw e to prevent the GND Plate from bending.

Strap Holder CVF

Hand Strap

(2)

GND Plate

(2) - b

(3)

(3) - a
CN407
(3) - e

Rear Cover Unit

(3)

(1)

Left Cover Unit

a b e
3mm 5.5mm 4.5mm
Metal
Black Black
M1.7
M1.7 M1.7
Self Tap Self Tap

Fig. 4-18

4-19
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-19 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1

(1) Remove the Cushion.
(2) Remove two screws (k × 2), and demount the Speaker.
(3) Remove one screw (m × 1), and demount the EJECT P.C.B.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Secure the Speaker Cable with the Cushion as shown below.

Speaker Ass’y
Speaker Holder

(2) (2) - k

(3)
EJECT P.C.B.

(3) - m

(1)

Cushion
Note on Reassembling (1) (3)
Red Black

k m
3.5mm 2mm
White Black Metal
Metal
Speaker M1.7
M1.7
Self Tap
Align the cushion with the rib edge.

Fig. 4-19

4-20
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-20 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 2

(1) Remove four screws (e × 2, k × 2*), and demount the Zoom Photo Key Ass'y.
*:(k × 2) On DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only
(2) Remove one screw (l × 1), and detach the Change Knob and Pplate Spring.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Reassemble the Change Knob, Plate Spring, and Zoom Photo Key Ass'y as shown below.
(2) In cases where the service-part Zoom Photo Key Ass'y is used, attach the adhesive double-coated tape part of the Flexible Cable to
the Top Part of the Change Switch.
(On DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only)

< Instruction for Supply >

On the Plate Spring click part of the Left Cover: HANAL FL-778 (DY9-3026-000)

Instruction for Supply

DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only
DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only

Change Knob

Hanal FL-778

Plate Spring

Zoom Photo Key Ass’y

(2)

(2) - l e
(1) - e
(1)
4.5mm
Black
M1.7
(1) - k Self Tap

k
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2) 3.5mm
DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E only Metal
M1.7
Self Tap

l
Change Knob
Plate Spring Change 4mm
Zoom Key Ass’y SW
Black
Change SW
M1.7
Adhesive double-coated tape
Self Tap

Fig. 4-20

4-21
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-21 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 3

(1) Remove four screws (f × 4). Detach the Cassette Cover by sliding the Part-A Claw.
(2) Remove four screws (e × 4), and demount the Cassette Arm Ass'y.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) With the Cassette Arm Ass'y open, reassemble the inner side while relieving the right retaining part. Then, secure two screws on the
bottom side.
(2) Secure two bottom screws on the Cassette Cover.

< Instruction for Supply >

Inside of Claw Part B on Cassette Arm Ass'y : HANAL KS-50M (DY9-3047-000)

(1) - f
A
Cassette Cover

AC SHOE
GND Plate
LI GND Plate
(2) - e

(1)

(1) - f

(2) - e

(2)
Note on Reassembling (1) B
(2) - e

Right
Retaining Part B
Instruction for Supply Cassette Arm Ass’y
Hanal KS-50M
B f e
2.5mm 4.5mm
Metal
Black
M1.7
M1.7
Cassette Arm Ass’y
Self Tap

Fig. 4-21

4-22
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-22 Separation of CVF Unit

(1) Remove the UL Tape.
(2) Remove four screws (a × 4), and demount the CVF Unit.
(Note) When removing the CVF Unit flexible Cable through the Rear Cover Unit hole, exercise care not to damage it.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Attach the Flexible Cable as shown below. Be sure to secure it with the UL Tape.

CVF Unit

(2)

Note on Reassembling (1)

(2) - a
FPC

(2) - a UL Tape
Insert into groove. (20 × 20)

(1) (2) - a a
3mm
Metal
Rear Cover Unit M1.7

UL Tape

Fig. 4-22

4-23
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-23 Disassembly of Rear Cover 1

(1) Disconnect the CN400 and CN406 connectors, and remove three screws (e × 3). Demount the LI P.C.B., CVF GND Plate, and
Battery Terminal.
(2) Remove two screws (l × 2), and demount the Terminal Holder.
(3) Remove two screws (k × 2), and remove the Battery Terminal from the Terminal Holder.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When soldering the cable wire to the battery terminal, follow the instruction shown in the figure.
(2) Pull out the Terminal Holder Cable from part A of the LI P.C.B.
(3) Attach the UL Tape to the LI-MAIN FPC as shown below.

Notes on Reassembling (1) 1.Bend the cable wire through

e k l
an angle of 90 or more as
illustrated, and then solder it 4.5mm 3.5mm 4mm
to the battery terminal. Metal
The height of solderign 2.The cable wire may be bent Black Black
shall be 1.0 mm or less. in any direction. M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
3.The lead part of the soldered Self Tap Self Tap Self Tap
cable wire should not protrude
from the battery terminal area.

(2) - l

CVF GND Plate

(1)
CN406

(2)
(1)

Terminal
Battery Holder
(1) - e
Terminal (3)

(1) Battery
Terminal
LI P.C.B. Red
CN400
Black
LI-MAIN FPC
(3) - k

Note on Reassembling (2)

Part A Note on Reassembling (3)

16mm
LI P.C.B.
9mm

Cable UL Tape LI-MAIN FPC

Fig. 4-23

4-24
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-24 Disassembly of Rear Cover 2

(1) Remove one screw (e × 1), and demount the Strap Holder.
(2) Remove two screws (e × 2), and detach the Plate, Shaft, and Hand Strap. Then, pull out the Power Key Ass'y in the arrow direction.
(3) Remove two screws (e × 2), and pull out the Card Base and Card Cover in the arrow direction. (On DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i
E only)
(Note) When pulling out the Power Key Ass'y, take care not to damage the Flexible Cable.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) With the Card Cover reassembled on the Card Base, mount it onto the Rear Cover.
(2) Take care not to mistake the mounting direction of the Hand Strap.
(3) Insert the top end of the Strap Holder as shown below. Mount the Strap Holder while turning it.

Power Key Ass’y

(2)

Hand Strap
(2)

Note on
Reassembling (3)

Plate
(2)

Rotate
(2) - e
Shaft
Card Base Note on Reassembling (1)
(1)
DM-MV550i E,
(3) Strap Holder DM-MV530i E
only
(1) - e
(3) - e
e
Card Cover
4.5mm
Black Card Shaft
M1.7
Self Tap

Fig. 4-24

4-25
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-25 Disassembly of Rear Cover 3

(1) Remove the claw from the back of the LCD Open Knob. Demount the LCD Lock Holder and Spring.
(2) Remove one screw (h × 1), and demount the Battery EJECT Lever, Lever Holder and Spring.

< Instruction for Supply >

On the Lever Holder Rail part: HANAL FL-778 (DY9-3026-000)
Spring × 2 : HANAL FL-778 (DY9-3026-000)

(2) - h

(2)

(1)
Spring
(2)
Battery
EJECT Lever

Spring (1)
LCD LCD Open Knob
Lock Holder

Lever Holder
Instruction for Supply Hanal FL-778
Hanal FL-778
h
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
Self Tap Hanal FL-778

Fig. 4-25

4-26
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-26 Disassembly of CVF Unit 1

(1) Detach the Dust Cover from the side of the CVF Unit.
(2) Remove two screws (a × 2), and detach the CVF Bottom Cover.
(3) Remove the CVF Plate by releasing the Dowel (with Tweezers or the like). The CVF plate can be removed by sliding it.

(2) - a

CVF Bottom Cover

(2) (3)
CVF Plate
(3)

Sliding

CVF Plate

Dowel
Tweezers

a
(1) 3mm
Metal
M1.7
Dust Cover

Fig. 4-26

4-27
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-27 Disassembly of CVF Unit 2

(1) Disengage the CVF-PCC FPC groove from the Projection A. Lift up the Finder and pull it frontward as illustrated. Remove the
finder while taking care not to damage the CVF-PCC FPC.
(2) Remove two screws (a × 2), and demount the Hinge Ass'y.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Engage the CVF-PCC FPC groove with the Projection A as shown below.

< Instruction for Supply >

On the click Spring part: HANAL KS-50M (DY9-3047-000)

(1)
CVF-PCC FPC
Lift up
Finder

(2) - a

CVF-PCC FPC Finder (2)

Remove

Finder

Projection A
(1)

Hinge Ass’y
Projection A
(2)
Note on Reassembling (1)
Instruction for Supply Projection A Hinge Ass’y

CVF-PCC
a FPC
3mm
Metal
Hanal KS-50M
M1.7

Fig. 4-27

4-28
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-28 Disassembly of CVF Unit 3

(1) Remove one screw (a × 1) and two Claws A. Demount the Eyepiece Holder, and CVF inner plate.
(2) Remove three screws (a × 2, r × 1), and detach the Lever Knob, Lens Base, Lens Holder and Lens 1.
(3) Detach the Eyepiece from the Eyepiece Holder.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When mounting the Lens Knob, attach the Boss on the Lens Holder as shown below.
(2) When mounting the Eyepiece Holder, insert the Claw A first and then push in the upper Claws B at two points while being careful
not to pinch the CVF-PCC FPC as shown below.

< Instruction for Supply >

On the Lever Knob sliding part : HANAL KS-50M (DY9-3047-000)
On the Lens Holder contacting face : HANAL KS-50M (DY9-3047-000)

(1) - a

(2) - r CVF
Lever Knob Inner Plate
(1)

Cushion
Cushion Eyepiece Eyepiece
Lens Base
Holder

Lens 1 (3)
Note on
Claw A (1) Reassembling (1)
(2)
Lens Knob

(2) - a Boss
Lens Holder
a
3mm Lens Holder
(2) - a
Metal
M1.7 Note on Reassembling (2)

r Push
2.3mm Instruction for Supply
Metal
M1.7
Instruction for Supply

Hanal
KS-50M
Hanal KS-50M Claw B
Lever Knob Claw A
Lens Holder contacting face CVF-PCC FPC

Fig. 4-28

4-29
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-29 Disassembly of CVF Unit 4

(1) Disconnect the CN4102 connectors, and demount the CVF P.C.B., LCD Ass'y, and Mask Plate.
(2) Disconnect the connector CN4101 from the CVF P.C.B., remove the CVF-PCC FPC, desolder part A. Then, demount the Back-
light Ass'y.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) Attach the Cushion with its gloss side oriented in the arrow direction shown below.
(2) Attach the CVF-PCC FPC to the CVF P.C.B. Insert Claw B first and then two Claws C for securing it.
(3) Pull the CVF-PCC FPC as shown in the figure.

Mask Plate
LCD Ass’y

Cushion

Back
Light
CVF P.C.B.

CN4102 (1)

CN4101 (2)

CVF-PCC FPC
(2)

Note on Reassembling (3)

(2) Solder A
CVF P.C.B.

Back Light
Ass’y
CVF-PCC FPC

Note on
Reassembling (1)
Claw C

Push upper part.

Claw C

Gloss side
Insert Claw B

Fig. 4-29

4-30
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-30 Disassembly of Camera Unit

(1) remove one screw (n × 1), and demount the Shoe Connector Ass'y, Shoe Base, and AAS FPC.
(Note) For demounting the Shoe Base, lift up two Dowel hooks slantwise as illustrated. Then, remove the Shoe Base
backward.
(2) Remove three screws (o × 3), and demount the Camera Holder.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When using the service-part rubber vibration isolator, apply HANAL FL-778 to its entire surface.
(2) Attach the UL tape to the AAS FPC as illustrated.

Shoe Connector Ass’y

(DM-MV550i E) Caution

Shoe Spacer
(DM-MV530i E, Dowel
(1) - n DM-MV500i E, Lift up
DM-MV510 E,
Rubber DM-MV500 E,
DM-MV490 E)

AAS FPC Shoe Base

(DM-MV550i E) Dowel

(1)
Note on Reassembling (2)
AAS FPC
20.0

9.0

UL Tape
Fold a surplus part, and attach it together.

Sheet
(2)

Camera Holder

Rubber n o
Rubber
3.8mm 4.5mm
Metal Black
(2) - o M1.7
(2) - o M1.7
Steped Screw

Fig. 4-30

4-31
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-31 CCD Ass'y

(1) Remove two screws (p × 2) and part-A solder. Demount the CCD P.C.B., CCD Ass'y, Rubber Part, and IR Filter.

< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When mounting the CCD P.C.B., secure it with two screws (p × 2) first. Then, provide soldering for the CCD Ass'y and CCD
P.C.B.

IR Filter (1)
CCD
A

Face thick side

to ward CCD side

Lens CCD P.C.B.

CCD P.C.B.
(1) - p
CCD Ass’y

Rubber

IR Filter

Lens Unit
CN1070

(1) p
6mm

Black
M1.7
Self Tap

Fig. 4-31

4-32
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-32 Lens Unit

(1) Remove the Lens Rubber part and three screws (q × 3). Demount the Front Lens Ass'y.
(2) Remove six screws (h × 4, k × 2) and solder (α). Demount the PZ Motor, AF Motor, IG Meter Ass'y, PZ Shaft, and AF Shaft.

< Instruction for Supply >

On the AF/PZ Zhaft and Guide Bar : LOGENEST LAMBDA A-74 (CY9-8102-000)

Instruction for Supply (2) - k

(2) - h
PZ Shaft
AF Shaft AF Motor

(2)
Guide Bar 2
LOGENEST LAMBDA
(2) - α
A-74 AF Shaft

(2) - h
Gide Bar

IG Meter Ass’y (2)

(2) - α
Flont Lens Ass’y
PZ Motor

(1) - q
PZ Shaft

(2) - α
(1)
Gide Bar

h k q

4.5mm 3.5mm 6mm

(1) - q
Metal Metal
(1) - q Metal
M1.7 M1.7
M1.7
Lens Rubber Self Tap Self Tap
Self Tap

Fig. 4-32

4-33
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-33 List of Screws

SYMBOL

SYMBOL
PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST

a XA1-7170-307 M1.7-3.0mm (Metal) 3mm j XA1-7170-657 M1.7-6.5mm (Metal) 6.5mm

Self Tap Self Tap

b XA4-9170-559 5.5mm k XA4-9170-357 3.5mm
M1.7-5.5mm (Black) M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)

Self Tap
c XA1-7170-407 M1.7-4.0mm (Metal) 4mm l XA4-9170-409 4mm
M1.7-4.0mm (Black)

Flat Head Screw

d XA1-3170-507 5mm m XA1-7170-207 M1.7-2.0mm (Metal) 2mm
M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)

Self Tap Stepped Screw

e XA4-9170-459 4.5mm n XA9-1349-000 3.8mm
M1.7-4.5mm (Black) M1.7-3.8mm (Metal)

Stepped Screw
f XA1-7170-257 M1.7-2.5mm (Metal) 2.5mm o XA9-1294-000 4.5mm
M1.7-4.5mm (Black)

Stepped Screw Self Tap

g XA9-1167-000 3.4mm p XA4-9170-609 6mm
M1.4-3.4mm (Metal) M1.7-6.0mm (Black)

Self Tap Self Tap

h XA4-9170-457 4.5mm q XA4-9170-607 6mm
M1.7-4.5mm (Metal) M1.7-6.0mm (Metal)

Stepped Screw
i XA1-7170-357 M1.7-3.5mm (Metal) 3.5mm r XA9-1166-000 2.3mm
M1.7-2.3mm (Metal)

4-34
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

1-34 List of Disassembly Photos

Front Cover Unit Front Side

Right Side Right Cover Unit

Left / Rear Cover Unit Left Cover Unit

4-35
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

Rear Cover Unit Camera / Recorder Unit

PCC / MAIN P.C.B. Left Unit

4-36
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2. Adjustment Procedures

2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement

After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum
required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty
condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
○ : Adjustment required
Camera system
Part name
No. Adjustment item GY PCC MAIN Adjustment setting
Lens CCD
PCB PCB PCB

2-2 AF section
2-2-1 CZ Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-2-2 Cam correction (AUT O) ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-3 IS section
2-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-3-2 Gyro Gain Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ Product condition
2-4 Camera section
2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment ○ ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ○ ○ Product condition

Recorder system
Part name
No. Adjustment item MAIN DMC PCC Adjustment setting
PCB II PCB
2-6 Recorder section
2-6-1, 2-6-2 Y LEVEL / C LEVEL Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-6-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-6-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
DMC II
2-7 T ape Path Adjustment T ape path adjustment setting

4-37
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-2 AF Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) The sections 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are
performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
Also, when section 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be
executed immediately without elapse of time. If execute section 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after elapse of time
upon completion of section 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.

Preparation)
(1) For CZ automatic adjustment/cam correction, set the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Tape/Card : Tape
Program AE : Auto Mode
ZOOM : Telephoto-end
CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens front
Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)

2-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment

CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. At STEP 5, DT : AA should be attained.

Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode.
(3) Perform the cam correction.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CZ PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 1D WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "1D'" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 0 WR 1D42 90 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Move to adjustment mode.
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 31 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "31'" is set up.
4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3100 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 00~08 BUSY Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is
completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG
condition is encountered in automatic adjustment,
check the parts inside the lens section.
5 Judgment on result of adjustment 5 2 RD 3100 AA WAIT Adjustment is completed (result is OK).
Perform the cam correction.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ FF WAIT Adjustment is completed (result is NG).
T ake the procedure again from the beginning.

4-38
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO)

CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Turn the main power off and on.
(2) Perform the cam correction by following the table below.
(3) Turn off the main power then back on. Check that defocusing does not occur in ordinary zooming operation. (AF ON)
(4) If the result is NG, perform 2-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO).

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation

CAM CORRECT ION PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 31 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "31'" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3101 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK
3 Cancel the service mode, and set the zoom position to the telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped, turn OFF the
AF function.
4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3202 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Perform the automatic correction.
5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3104 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK
6 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3105 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of writing the correction data.

4-39
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-3 IS Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) Perform the IS adjustment after machine is re-assembled to a product status.
(2) Prepare a tripod or stable work bench.

Preparation)
(1) According to the following table, set the high address to enter the IS adjustment mode.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
IS ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 32 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD **00 ↑ OK High address "32" is set up.

2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment

SPEC. Automatic adjusutment

Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.

Note)
After the STORE key is pressed, it will take about 25 seconds at a maximum before completion of adjustment (OK) message
appears.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
GYRO OFFSET PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 320D 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.

2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment

SPEC. Data Writing

Procedure)
(1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
GYRO GAIN PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 Gyro YAW gain adjustment
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3200 90 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2 Gyro PIT CH gain adjustment
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3201 92 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.

4-40
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-3-3 EEPROM Writing

SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write the adjustment data (from 2-3-1 through 2) into EEPROM.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
EEPROM WRIT ING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 320F 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.

4-41
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-4 Camera Section Adjustment

Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (2-4-1 to 2-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the EEPROM as mentioned in 2-4-6. If power must
be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the EEPROM write procedure as mentioned in 2-4-6.
(2) The adjustments from 2-4-2 through 2-4-5 must be carried out in series.

Preparation)
(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Program AE : Auto Mode
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Chart : Standard angle of view (Set the angle after setting the high address.)

<Preparation for camera adjustment>

(1) Referring to the table shown below, set the high address for camera adjustment mode.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CAM ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 30 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "30" is set up.

2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment

CHART Light box (5600°K)

SPEC. Automatic adjustment.

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris Encoder.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
IRIS ENC. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3000 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.

2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)

CHART Light box (5600°K)

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
WB (1) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3002 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.

Note) In this adjustment, color balance gain data is set to FF. Be sure to carry out color balance adjustment de-
scribed in 2-4-3.

4-42
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment

CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart (white area at the left side)
M.EQ. Vectorscope
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
SPEC. R : × 2.1 (ratio to burst) 104°, Ye : × 1.3 (ratio to burst) 162°

Procedure)
(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CB (MANUAL) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
R-Y GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust relevant data. 5 2 WR 3007 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Y GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 ↑ 3008 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
R-Y MAT 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 ↑ 3009 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Y MAT 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 ↑ 300A "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.

2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2)

CHART Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filter

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (2).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
WB (2) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3004 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.

2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3)

CHART Light box (5600°K)

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (3).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
WB (3) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3005 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.

4-43
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-4-6 EEPROM Writing

SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write adjustment data (from 2-4-1 to 2-4-5) into the EEPROM.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
EEPROM WRIT ING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3006 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.

4-44
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation

Notes)
(1) Perform this adjustment only if a void pixel is found on the CCD.
(2) Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for 30 minutes.
(3) The automatic mode (2-5-1) and the manual mode (2-5-2) are available for this adjustment.
In the automatic adjustment mode, “NG” is recognized if there are more than two void pixels on the center area of the screen or
more than eight void pixels on the entire screen. (If NG is recognized, the automatic adjustment is not performed.)
In the manual adjustment mode, it is allowed to correct up to eight void pixels on the entire screen.
In this mode, an arbitrary point may be selected for correction.

2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic)

Preparation)
(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
(2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE : AUTO
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Demo mode : OFF

Procedure)
(1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 High address setting
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 30 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "30" is set up.
2 CCD void pixel correction
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 300E 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ −− OK Adjustment is completed.
3 EEPROM writing
3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 300F 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.

4-45
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual)

Note)
1) Use the full scan monitor for this adjustment.

Preparation)
1) Take the product condition for this adjustment.
2) Adjustment conditions
Program AE : LOW LIGHT
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Electronic zoom : OFF

M.EQ. Monitor TV

Procedure)
(1) Before switching to the service mode, press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen.
(2) Select the service mode, and then set up the CCD void pixel correction adjustment mode (manual) following the table given below.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 FF WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "FF" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 RD FF00 00 WAIT Entering the CCD pixel missing compensation
mode is complete. (AGC MAX., Iris close)

3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR FFFF 02 WAIT See table below for angle of CCD.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK for selection.
(Unused marker is appeared at view angle of
"Area"C.)

*Angle of CCD for selection

B Electronic
Vibration-proof
Area DT Angle of section Pixel area
A 00 No shift (normal angle)
B 01 Sectioning at top
C 02 Sectioning at bottom
A
(Normal field of view)

* In the adjustment mode, an image including the left and right marginal parts is output on the monitor.

Fig. 4-33

(3) Press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen.
(4) Move an unused marker (arranged at left of screen) to the position where a pixel is missing. The movement is done by changing the
data at the address corresponding to each marker.
The addresses corresponding to the markers are shown in Fig.4-30

4-46
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

Notes)
1) The odd-numbered marker is for odd-numbered lines (ODD) and the even-numbered marker is for even-numbered lines (EVEN).
If the marker cannot be aligned with a pixel void position, use the marker for a different line.
2) As shown in the Fig.4-33, the pixel missing compensation over entire CCD area cannot be performed on a single screen due to the
electronic vibration- proof area. Therefore, before the adjustment, change the data of the STEP 3 to select the area for compensation.
If the marker is not appeared at this time, choose the area where the marker appears, move the marker toward the area for compen-
sation until it appears on the desired area, and write the data temporarily. Then, select the compensation area again, and move the
marker to the pixel void position.

FULL SCAN MONITOR

Marker Direction Address
1 H FF01
(ODD) V FF03 FF01
2 H FF05
(EVEN) V FF07
3 H FF09
(ODD) V FF0B
4 H FF0D FF03
(EVEN) V FF0F
5 H FF11
(ODD) V FF13
6 H FF15
(EVEN) V FF17
7 H FF19
*Missing
(ODD) V FF1B
8 H FF1D
(EVEN) V FF1F

Fig. 4-34

* The following table shows the procedure for moving marker 1.

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Specify address in H direction and set WR mode. 5 2 WR FF01 80 WAIT
2) Change the data and then move the marker ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ ↑
(H direction).
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ OK
2 1) Specify address in V direction and set WR mode. 5 2 WR FF03 80 WAIT
2) Change the data and then move the marker ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ ↑
(H direction).
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ OK
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, and register the marker
at the position where pixel is missing.

(5) Carry out write-in to EEPROM according to the table below.

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 In case of markers 1 to 4
1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR FF20 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
In case of markers 5 to 8
1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR FF21 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.

(6) Reset the service mode, and close the lens. After ten seconds, check that missing pixels have been compensated for.

Notes)
1) Since the marker is larger than a pixel, although they may seem to be superposed on one another at adjustment, there may actually
be some deviation.
2) In marker overlap condition or when there are adjacent missing pixels within ±2 Hex in the V and H directions, writing is impossible.

4-47
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment

Preparation)
(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.

2-6-1 Y LEVEL Adjustment

TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. 980 ± 20 [mV]

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Y level adjustment.

980 ± 20mV

4-35

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation

Y LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001E ADJ White raster is output.
2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.

4-48
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-6-2 C LEVEL Adjustment

TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. 710 ± 20 [mV]

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out C level adjustment.

700 ± 20mV

Fig.4-36

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation

C LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001F ADJ Green raster is output.
2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ Adjustment is in progress.
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.

2-6-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment (DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E)

SIGNAL COLOR BAR

MODE E-E (ANALOG LINE IN)
SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)
(1) Input a color bar signal to the analog line circuit from the pattern generator.
(2) Carry out AGC initial value adjustment according to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
AGC INIT IAL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **04 FF
2) Press the ST ORE Key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.

4-49
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-6-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment

MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON)
SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.85 ± 0.02 [V]

Note)
1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.

Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.85 ± 0.02[V].
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
BAT T ERY VOLT AGE DROP PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 2 WR **FF --
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.

2-6-5 SWP Adjustment

MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000)

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
SWP (AUT O) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **01 --
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.

2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment

MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000)

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
C.FG (AUT O) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **03 --
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.

4-50
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-6-7 LCD P.C.B. Setting for Destination

When mounting the LCD P.C.B. of service part, perform the following adjustment.
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 High address setting
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 02
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address "02" is set up.
2 Setting for Destination
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0230 --
2) After adding the 0F to the current data, ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ *
press the ST ORE key.
2-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0241 0D
2) Change the data to 15, ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 15 *
and press the ST ORE key.
2-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0242 0D
2) Change the data to 18, ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 18 * T he LCD P.C.B. setting for destination
and press the ST ORE key. (market place) is completed.

4-51
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

2-7 Tape Path Adjustment

Symptom of maladjustment : Tape compatibility is not attained on other equipment (block noise occurs).

Note)
(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC II Service
Manual separately issued.

Preparation)
(1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 3-2).

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below (STEP 1), set up the forced SP mode.
(2) Referring to the table given below (STEPS 2, 3, 4), play back the tracking master (DY9-1345-000) for tape path adjustment.
At STEP 3, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of 01 to 07 so that the RF envelope will be 70%.
(3) After adjustment, restore the settings of forced SP and tracking shift to the normal conditions of the product state referring to the
table given below (STEP 5).
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
T RACKING T APE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1)Set up the forced SP mode.
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 01
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address "01" is set up.
1-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0110 1A
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of forced SP mode setting.
2 1) Play back the tracking tape.
3 1) Set up tracking shift.
3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 00
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address "00" is set up.
3-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0051 FF
2) Perform 70% tracking shift by ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 00~0F * T he amount of tracking shift is changed.
adjusting DT in a range of 00 to 07.
4 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.
5 1) Restore the settings to the normal conditions of the product state.
5-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0051 FF
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * T racking shift released
5-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 01
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address "01" is set up.
5-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0110 18
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Forced SP mode released

4-52
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT

Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach

the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.

Color balance adjustment chart

PAL
DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E
DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E
DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
R-Y
R

BURST

Ye

B-Y

4-53
 CHAPTER 5. PARTS LIST

CONTENTS
EXPLODED VIEWS
Casing Parts Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2
Front Cover Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-4
Left Cover Unit Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Left Cover Unit Section-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-8
Right Cover Unit Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-10
LCD Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-12
Rear Cover Unit Section-1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-14
Rear Cover Unit Section-2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-16
CVF Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-18
Recorder Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-20
Camera Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-22
Lens Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-24
Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-26
Mechanical Chassis Section-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-28
Mechanical Chassis Section-3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-30
Mechanical Chassis Section-4 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-32
Accessory Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-34
Accessory Section-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-36
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-38
PARTS LISDT ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-39
 CAUTION

1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.
Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list.

5-1
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Casing Parts Section

1×4 5 REAR UNIT
2 8×2 12
3
11
3×2

4
13×2
6 *2
5×2
LEFT COVER 4×2
UNIT *1
9 3
3
3
3
7 10 3 CAMERA/LENS/
3×4
RECODRER UNIT

FRONT COVER UNIT

5
RIGHT COVER UNIT

8 5 *1 : DM-MV550i E,DM-MV530i E ONLY

*2 : DM-MV500i E,DM-MV510 E,500E,490E ONLY

5-2
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW
2 DA2-0436-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY
3 XA1-7170-307 000 F 12 SCREW
4 XA4-9170-459 000 F 3(1) SCREW *( )DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
5 XA1-7170-407 000 F 5 SCREW
6 DG1-4362-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE LOCK ASS’Y NEW
7 D52-0100-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS
8 XA4-9170-559 000 F 3 SCREW
9 DG1-4332-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK 1 NEW
10 DH2-2253-000 000 C 1 FPC, JACK 1-MAIN NEW
11 DA2-1594-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, STRAP L NEW
12 DA2-1607-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT DM-MV550i E NEW
DA2-1686-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT DM-MV530i E NEW
DA2-1687-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
13 XA4-9170-409 000 F 2 SCREW DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E

5-3
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Front Cover Section

7

1 3×3
2

10
7
9
8

5-4
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DA2-1627-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV JACK DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DA2-1620-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV JACK DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
2 DY1-8401-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT DM-MV550i E NEW
DY1-8418-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT DM-MV530i E, 500i E NEW
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
3 XA4-9170-459 000 F 4 SCREW
4 DY1-8411-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y DM-MV550i E NEW
DY1-8421-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y DM-MV530i E, 500i E NEW
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
5 DY1-8412-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, S JACK DM-MV550i E NEW
DY1-8422-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, S JACK DM-MV530i E NEW
DY1-8428-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, S JACK DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
6 XA1-7170-207 000 F 1 SCREW
7 DA2-1682-000 000 C 2 CUSHION NEW
8 DY1-8413-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y NEW
9 DA1-9861-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC
10 DA2-1644-000 000 C 1 HOLDER ,MIC NEW

5-5
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Left Cover Unit Section-1

1
*1

5 7
6
8×2

9
3
2×2
10×2 10×2

LEFT COVER 11

4 *1 : DM-MV550i E,DM-MV530i E ONLY

5-6
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DA2-0475-000 000 B 1 KNOB, CHANGE DM-MV550i E, 530i E
2 XA1-7170-307 000 F 2 SCREW
3 DG1-4333-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK 2 DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DG1-4342-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK 2 DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
4 DH2-2254-000 000 C 1 FPC, JACK 2-MAIN NEW
5 DA2-0477-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CHANGE DM-MV550i E, 530i E
6 XA4-9170-409 000 F 1 SCREW DM-MV550i E, 530i E
7 DG1-4355-000 000 B 1 ZOOM, PHOTO KEY ASS’Y DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DG1-4356-000 000 B 1 ZOOM, PHOTO KEY ASS’Y DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
8 XA4-9170-459 000 F 2 SCREW
9 WR1-5083-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER NEW
10 XA4-9170-357 000 F 4(2) SCREW *( )DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
11 DA2-1649-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW

5-7
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Left Cover Unit Section-2

2 4

1×2

6
5 7
1×2

9
10

7×2 8
7

5-8
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA1-7170-257 000 F 4 SCREW
2 DA2-1582-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE NEW
3 DA2-1653-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV550i E NEW
DA2-1656-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV530i E NEW
DA2-1660-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV500i E NEW
DA2-1706-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DA-MV510 E NEW
DA2-1659-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV500 E NEW
DA2-1707-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV490 E NEW
4 DY1-8407-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LEFT DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DY1-8426-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LEFT DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E NEW
5 DF1-1650-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE ARMU ASS’Y NEW
6 DA2-1595-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LI GND NEW
7 XA4-9170-459 000 F 4 SCREW
8 DA2-1596-000 000 C 1 PLATE, AC SHOE GND NEW
9 DY1-8408-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, EJECT NEW
10 XA1-7170-207 000 F 1 SCREW

5-9
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Right Cover Unit Section

4
1
2

LCD UNIT

2×3
7

5-10
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DA2-1650-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
2 XA4-9170-457 000 F 4 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-657 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
4 DY1-8403-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT DM-MV550i E NEW
DY1-8420-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT DM-MV530i E NEW
DY1-8424-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
5 DA2-1553-000 000 B 1 KNOB, OPEN NEW
6 DA2-1665-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DM-MV500i E, 500 E
DA2-1675-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION DM-MV510 E, 490 E NEW
7 DA2-1532-000 000 B 1 COVER, RB DM-MV550i E NEW
DA2-1560-000 000 B 1 COVER, RB DM-MV530i E NEW
DA2-1561-000 000 B 1 COVER, RB DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E

5-11
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

LCD Unit Section

11

10
9

7
6×2
5

1×5 3
2

5-12
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA1-7170-357 000 F 5 SCREW
2 DA2-1690-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV550i E NEW
DA2-1694-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV530i E NEW
DA2-1698-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV500i E NEW
DA2-1693-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV510 E NEW
DA2-1697-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV500 E NEW
DA2-1689-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV490 E NEW
3 DG1-4331-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW
4 XA1-7170-257 000 F 1 SCREW
5 DG1-4135-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y
6 DA2-0399-000 000 C 2 SHEET, LCD
*1 7 WG2-5210-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y
*2 DY1-8333-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
8 DA2-1635-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW
9 DA2-1636-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BOTTOM COVER NEW
10 DY1-8404-000 000 B 1 HINGE ASS’Y NEW
11 DA2-1647-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LCD BOTTOM DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DA2-1646-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LCD BOTTOM DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E

*1 : Same quality as the production line.

*2 : Free from the pixel dot.

5-13
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Rear Cover Unit Section-1

CVF UNIT

1
2

1×3
7×2

5×2
4 8
9×2

4×2
10×2

5-14
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 4 SCREW
2 DA2-1617-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF GND NEW
3 DG1-4336-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LI DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DG1-4343-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LI DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
4 XA4-9170-459 000 F 3 SCREW
5 DA2-1612-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL, BATTERY D NEW
6 DH2-2255-000 000 C 1 FPC, LI-MAIN NEW
7 XA4-9170-409 000 F 2 SCREW
8 DA2-0350-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TERMINAL
9 DF1-1652-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL, BATTERY NEW
10 XA4-9170-357 000 F 2 SCREW

5-15
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Rear Cover Unit Section-2

7
1
6

11
2
4
3
9 12
10
5 8

11

11 13
11×2 11

14
15
*1 : DM-MV550i E,DM-MV530i E ONLY 16
*1

5-16
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DA2-0441-000 000 B 1 STRAP, HAND
2 DA2-1608-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT NEW
3 DS1-5395-000 000 C 1 SPRING NEW
4 DA2-1613-000 000 B 1 LEVER, BATTERY EJECT NEW
5 DA2-1615-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LEVER NEW
6 DA2-1606-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR DM-MV550i E NEW
DA2-1678-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR DM-MV530i E NEW
DA2-1618-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
7 DG1-4357-000 000 C 1 POWER KEY ASS’Y DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DG1-4358-000 000 C 1 POWER KEY ASS’Y DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
8 DA2-1549-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, LCD LOCK NEW
9 DS1-5397-000 000 C 1 SPRING NEW
10 DA2-1609-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRIP BELT NEW
11 XA4-9170-459 000 F 6(4) SCREW *( )DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
12 DA2-1548-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD OPEN NEW
13 DA2-1611-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, STRAP R NEW
14 DA2-1545-000 000 C 1 BASE, CARD DM-MV550i E NEW
DA2-1529-000 000 C 1 BASE, CARD DM-MV530i E NEW
15 DA2-1544-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD DM-MV550i E NEW
DA2-1530-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD DM-MV530i E NEW
16 DA2-1546-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW

5-17
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

CVF Unit Section

15 16
14

13
7 12
11 4×2
10
9
17
8
5 18

6
19
20
1
21

2 4×2
24
22
3
23
4×2 4

5-18
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DG1-4360-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, CVF NEW
2 DA2-1571-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF NEW
3 DA2-1570-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
4 XA1-7170-307 000 F 7 SCREW
5 DA2-1566-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
6 DA2-1573-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW
7 DH2-2256-000 000 C 1 FPC, CVF-PCC NEW
8 DG1-4334-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW
9 DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y
10 DA2-1579-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF BACK LIGHT NEW
11 DA2-0884-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
12 WG2-5194-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW
13 DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
14 DA2-1567-000 000 B 1 BARREL, CVF INNER NEW
15 DA1-9749-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, EYE PIECE LENS NEW
16 YN1-1612-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYE PIECE G2 NEW
17 YN1-1611-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYE PIECE G1 NEW
18 DA2-1578-000 000 C 1 SPACER, EYE PIECE LENS NEW
19 DA1-9755-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, KNOB NEW
20 DA1-9752-000 000 B 1 KNOB, EYE LEVEL NEW
21 XA9-1166-000 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
22 DA2-1568-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, EYE PIECE NEW
23 DA2-1577-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF INNER NEW
24 DA2-1569-000 000 B 1 RUBBER, EYE PIECE NEW

5-19
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Recorder Unit Section

4×2
2
1
3 CAMERA/LENS
UNIT

RECODRER 10×3
UNIT 6 11
12×3
17
15 18
16
4×3
5
7
4
19
8
21

9 4
14
13 4
20

5-20
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DA1-9796-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CASSETTE
2 DY1-8282-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC II (3CH) DM-MV550i E
DY1-8264-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC II DM-MV530i E, 500i E
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
3 DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, DMC
4 XA1-7170-257 000 F 8 SCREW
5 DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
6 DA2-1523-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW
7 DH2-2199-000 000 C 1 FPC, SJ
8 WS1-5705-000 000 C 1 JACK, S VIDEO
9 DA2-1602-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
10 DA1-9779-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
11 DA2-0314-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
12 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW
13 DA2-1648-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
14 DA2-1525-000 000 C 1 COVER, CAPSTAN NEW
15 DA2-0452-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA B
16 DY1-8410-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV550i E NEW
DY1-8433-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV530i E NEW
DY1-8431-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV500i E NEW
DY1-8430-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV510 E, 500 E NEW
DM-MV490 E
17 DA2-0453-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA H
18 DA2-0454-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA F
19 DA2-1556-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
20 DA2-1528-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
21 DG1-4329-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, PCC DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DG1-4341-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, PCC DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E

5-21
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Camera Unit Section

1
*1
2
3 1

7
4 6
5 9×2
*2

10

11
LENS UNIT

13×3

14×3 *1, 2 : DM-MV550i E ONLY

12

5-22
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DG1-7296-000 000 C 1 SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y DM-MV550i E
DA2-1645-000 000 C 1 SPACER, SHOE DM-MV530i E, 500i E NEW
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
2 XA9-1349-000 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
3 DA2-1622-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, SHOE NEW
4 DH2-2257-000 000 C 1 FPC, AAS DM-MV550i E NEW
5 DH9-0850-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR NEW
6 DA2-1526-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW
7 DY1-8416-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y NEW
8 DG1-4330-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD NEW
9 XA4-9170-609 000 F 2 SCREW
10 DH2-2258-000 000 C 1 FPC, CCD-PCC NEW
11 DA2-1641-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW
12 DA2-1527-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CAMERA HOLDER NEW
13 DA2-1524-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW
14 XA9-1294-000 000 F 3 SCREW

5-23
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Lens Unit Section

6×2

8
5 8
7
7
4
6×2

3 9

1×3

5-24
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA4-9170-607 000 F 3 SCREW
2 YH8-0112-000 000 C 1 IG METER UNIT NEW
3 YG9-6000-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, PZ NEW
4 YG9-5999-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, AF NEW
5 YG1-0154-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, AF
6 XA4-9170-457 000 F 4 SCREW
7 YG9-6001-000 000 C 2 PHOTO, INTERRUPTER NEW
8 XA4-9170-357 000 F 2 SCREW
9 YG1-0153-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, PZ

5-25
 DMC II

Mechanical Chassis Section-1

(2)

(3) 1

4 (9)

5×4
6

2×3

Slide Chassis
Ass’y

11
10
12

5-26
 DMC II

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y
2 DA2-0642-000 000 F 4 SCREW
3 DF1-1569-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y
4 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 4 SCREW
6 DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y
7 DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y
8 DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH) DM-MV550i E
DY1-8265-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y DM-MV530i E, 500i E,
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
9 DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE
10 DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y
11 DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
12 DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW

5-27
 DMC II

Mechanical Chassis Section-2

1 (8) (5)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(12)

(5)×2 (4)

(6)
(10)
(9)

(13)

(14)

(18)

19

(15) (14) (17)

(11)

(16)

5-28
 DMC II

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DY1-8211-000 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y
2 DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
3 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
4 DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER
5 DA2-0642-000 000 F 3 SCREW
6 DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER
7 DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
8 DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
9 DS1-0172-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
10 DF1-1566-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB
11 DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER
12 DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM
13 DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y
14 DA2-0645-000 000 F 2 WASHER
15 DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y
16 DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
17 DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y
18 DA2-0643-000 000 F 1 SCREW
19 DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL

5-29
 DMC II

Mechanical Chassis Section-3

8

1×2 9
7
2 10

12×3
3

5 11

14
6
6 4
15 17
21
12×2 16

13 FACE

20
18

22×2 19

5-30
 DMC II

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW
2 DA2-0645-000 000 F 1 WASHER
3 DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL
4 DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S
5 DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T
6 DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER
7 DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
8 DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
9 DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER
10 DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y
11 DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
12 DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW
13 DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y
14 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
15 DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE
16 DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER
17 DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
18 XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING
19 DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR
20 DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP
21 DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR
22 XA1-7140-147 000 F 2 SCREW

5-31
 DMC II

Mechanical Chassis Section-4

5 5
8
12
6 10

1×2
7
9
2 11

4
REAR FACE 13

14

5-32
 DMC II

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA1-7140-147 000 F 3 SCREW
2 DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS.
3 DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 2
4 DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL
5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 1
7 DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE
8 DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR
9 DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
10 DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR
11 DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM
12 DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD
13 DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER
14 DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE

5-33
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Accessory Section-1
N.S. (Product available) N.S. (Product available)
CR-560 CA-560
3

1
DC CABLE 5

2
CB-560
JPN
A
E
PLUG TYPE B
AS
WL-D77A (DM-MV550i E, MV530i E)
N.S. (Product available)
WL-D74A (DM-MV500i E)
BP-508/511/512/522/535 WL-D74E (DM-MV510 E, MV500 E, MV490 E)
MMC-8M

10
7
(8)
6 (9)

5-34
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DY1-8244-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE
2 DY1-8243-000 000 C 1 CAR BATTERY CABLE CB-560
3 D89-0900-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE
4 DY4-4763-000 000 C 1 CORD, DC
5 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E) PLUG TYPE E
D82-0644-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(B) PLUG TYPE B
D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS) PLUG TYPE AS
6 DY1-8242-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-511(BROWN) BP-511/512
DY1-8303-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-522(GRAY) BP-508/522/535
7 D83-0582-000 000 C 1 WL-D77A WIRELESS CONTROLLER DM-MV550i E, 530i E
D83-0522-000 000 C 1 WL-D74A WIRELESS CONTROLLER DM-MV500i E
D83-0523-000 000 C 1 WL-D74E WIRELESS CONTROLLER DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
8 DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
9 DY1-8120-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E)
10 DY1-8277-000 000 C 1 MULTIMEDIA CARD MMC-8M

5-35
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

Accessory Section-2
N.S. (Product available) N.S. (Product available)
DM-50 WD-30.5

2 5

1 4

N.S. (Product available)

TL-30.5

IFC-300PCU
N.S. (Product available) N.S. (Product available)
VL-3 4

N.S. (Product available)

FS-30.5
3
PC-A10 7

SS-800
6

5-36
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 DY1-8246-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, FRONT
2 DY1-8247-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, REAR
3 DY1-8245-000 000 E 1 LAMP, HAROGEN
4 DY4-4764-000 000 C 1 CAP, CONVERTER(FRONT)
5 DY4-4765-000 000 C 1 CAP, CONVERTER(REAR)
6 D81-1430-000 000 C 1 SHOULDER STRAP SS-800
7 DY4-3338-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, SCART PC-A10

5-37
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

ELECTRICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MAIN P.C.B.
CN100 VS1-5988-012 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 12P
CN101 VS1-5988-028 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 28P NEW
CN303 VS1-6719-005 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 5P
CN304 VS1-6596-033 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 33P
CN801 VS1-6448-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 21P
CN802 VS1-6448-015 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 15P
CN3550 WS1-5879-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DV

PCC P.C.B.
CN1201 VS1-6448-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 21P
CN1501 VS1-6596-017 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 17P NEW
FU3200 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSE
FU3201 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSE
FU3202 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSE DM-MV550i E, 530i E
FU3203 VD7-2241-501 000 C 1 FUSE
FU3204 WD1-5063-000 000 C 1 FUSE

5-38
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
3 D52-0100-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS
37 D81-1430-000 000 C 1 SHOULDER STRAP SS-800
35 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E) PLUG TYPE E
35 D82-0644-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(B) PLUG TYPE B
35 D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS) PLUG TYPE AS
35 D83-0522-000 000 C 1 WL-D74A WIRELESS CONTROLLER DM-MV500i E
35 D83-0523-000 000 C 1 WL-D74E WIRELESS CONTROLLER DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
35 D83-0582-000 000 C 1 WL-D77A WIRELESS CONTROLLER DM-MV550i E,530i E
35 D89-0900-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE
19 DA1-9749-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, EYE PIECE LENS NEW
19 DA1-9752-000 000 B 1 KNOB, EYE LEVEL NEW
19 DA1-9755-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, KNOB NEW
19 DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
21 DA1-9779-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
21 DA1-9796-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CASSETTE
5 DA1-9861-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC
21 DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
21 DA2-0314-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
15 DA2-0350-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TERMINAL
13 DA2-0399-000 000 C 2 SHEET, LCD
3 DA2-0436-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY
17 DA2-0441-000 000 B 1 STRAP, HAND
21 DA2-0452-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA B
21 DA2-0453-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA H
21 DA2-0454-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA F
7 DA2-0475-000 000 B 1 KNOB, CHANGE DM-MV550i E, 530i E
7 DA2-0477-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CHANGE DM-MV550i E, 530i E
31 DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP
33 DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 2
33 DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM
33 DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD
33 DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER
33 DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR
27,29 DA2-0642-000 000 F 7 SCREW
27,29,33 DA2-0643-000 000 F 7 SCREW
31 DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW
29,31 DA2-0645-000 000 F 3 WASHER
27,29,31 DA2-0646-000 000 F 3 WASHER
29 DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM
29 DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER
33 DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR
29 DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER
29 DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
31 DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL
27 DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW
27 DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
31 DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER
31 DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW
31 DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER
29 DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER
27 DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE
19 DA2-0884-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
21 DA2-1523-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW
23 DA2-1524-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW
21 DA2-1525-000 000 C 1 COVER, CAPSTAN NEW
23 DA2-1526-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW
23 DA2-1527-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CAMERA HOLDER NEW
21 DA2-1528-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
17 DA2-1529-000 000 C 1 BASE, CARD DM-MV530i E NEW
17 DA2-1530-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD DM-MV530i E NEW

5-39
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
11 DA2-1532-000 000 B 1 COVER, RB DM-MV550i E NEW
17 DA2-1544-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD DM-MV550i E NEW
17 DA2-1545-000 000 C 1 BASE, CARD DM-MV550i E NEW
17 DA2-1546-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
17 DA2-1548-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD OPEN NEW
17 DA2-1549-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, LCD LOCK NEW
11 DA2-1553-000 000 B 1 KNOB, OPEN NEW
21 DA2-1556-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
11 DA2-1560-000 000 B 1 COVER, RB DM-MV530i E NEW
11 DA2-1561-000 000 B 1 COVER, RB DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
19 DA2-1566-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
19 DA2-1567-000 000 B 1 BARREL, CVF INNER NEW
19 DA2-1568-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, EYE PIECE NEW
19 DA2-1569-000 000 B 1 RUBBER, EYE PIECE NEW
19 DA2-1570-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
19 DA2-1571-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF NEW
19 DA2-1573-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW
19 DA2-1577-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF INNER NEW
19 DA2-1578-000 000 C 1 SPACER, EYE PIECE LENS NEW
19 DA2-1579-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF BACK LIGHT NEW
9 DA2-1582-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE NEW
3 DA2-1594-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, STRAP L NEW
9 DA2-1595-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LI GND NEW
9 DA2-1596-000 000 C 1 PLATE, AC SHOE GND NEW
21 DA2-1602-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
17 DA2-1606-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR DM-MV550i E NEW
3 DA2-1607-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT DM-MV550i E NEW
17 DA2-1608-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT NEW
17 DA2-1609-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRIP BELT NEW
17 DA2-1611-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, STRAP R NEW
15 DA2-1612-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL, BATTERY D NEW
17 DA2-1613-000 000 B 1 LEVER, BATTERY EJECT NEW
17 DA2-1615-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LEVER NEW
15 DA2-1617-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF GND NEW
17 DA2-1618-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
5 DA2-1620-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV JACK DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
23 DA2-1622-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, SHOE NEW
5 DA2-1627-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV JACK DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
13 DA2-1635-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW
13 DA2-1636-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BOTTOM COVER NEW
23 DA2-1641-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW
5 DA2-1644-000 000 C 1 HOLDER ,MIC NEW
23 DA2-1645-000 000 C 1 SPACER, SHOE DM-MV530i E, 500i E NEW
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
13 DA2-1646-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LCD BOTTOM DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
13 DA2-1647-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LCD BOTTOM DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
21 DA2-1648-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
7 DA2-1649-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
11 DA2-1650-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
9 DA2-1653-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV550i E NEW
9 DA2-1656-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV530i E NEW
9 DA2-1659-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV500 E NEW
9 DA2-1660-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV500i E NEW
11 DA2-1665-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
DM-MV500i E, 500 E
11 DA2-1675-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION DM-MV510 E, 490 E NEW

5-40
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
17 DA2-1678-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR DM-MV530i E NEW
5 DA2-1682-000 000 C 2 CUSHION NEW
3 DA2-1686-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT DM-MV530i E NEW
3 DA2-1687-000 000 B 1 COVER, LITHIUM BATT DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
13 DA2-1689-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV490 E NEW
13 DA2-1690-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV550i E NEW
13 DA2-1693-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV510 E NEW
13 DA2-1694-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV530i E NEW
13 DA2-1697-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV500 E NEW
13 DA2-1698-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP DM-MV500i E NEW
9 DA2-1706-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DA-MV510 E NEW
9 DA2-1707-000 000 B 1 LABEL, NAME DM-MV490 E NEW
27 DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y
33 DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 1
31 DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR
33 DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE
33 DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL
33 DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE
33 DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS.
31 DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
31 DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y
31 DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S
31 DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T
29 DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y
29 DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y
31 DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
31 DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
29 DF1-1566-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB
31 DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE
27 DF1-1569-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y
9 DF1-1650-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE ARMU ASS’Y NEW
15 DF1-1652-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL, BATTERY NEW
27 DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y
31 DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER
29 DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
33 DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
27 DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y
31 DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y
21 DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, DMC
19 DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y
13 DG1-4135-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y
21 DG1-4329-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, PCC DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
23 DG1-4330-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD NEW
13 DG1-4331-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW
3 DG1-4332-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK 1 NEW
7 DG1-4333-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK 2 DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
19 DG1-4334-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW
15 DG1-4336-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LI DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
21 DG1-4341-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, PCC DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
7 DG1-4342-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK 2 DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
15 DG1-4343-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LI DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
7 DG1-4355-000 000 B 1 ZOOM, PHOTO KEY ASS’Y DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
7 DG1-4356-000 000 B 1 ZOOM, PHOTO KEY ASS’Y DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
17 DG1-4357-000 000 C 1 POWER KEY ASS’Y DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW

5-41
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
17 DG1-4358-000 000 C 1 POWER KEY ASS’Y DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
19 DG1-4360-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, CVF NEW
3 DG1-4362-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE LOCK ASS’Y NEW
23 DG1-7296-000 000 C 1 SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y DM-MV550i E
31 DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR
21 DH2-2199-000 000 C 1 FPC, SJ
3 DH2-2253-000 000 C 1 FPC, JACK 1-MAIN NEW
7 DH2-2254-000 000 C 1 FPC, JACK 2-MAIN NEW
15 DH2-2255-000 000 C 1 FPC, LI-MAIN NEW
19 DH2-2256-000 000 C 1 FPC, CVF-PCC NEW
23 DH2-2257-000 000 C 1 FPC, AAS DM-MV550i E NEW
23 DH2-2258-000 000 C 1 FPC, CCD-PCC NEW
29 DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y
23 DH9-0850-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR NEW
29 DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
29 DS1-0172-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
29 DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
31 DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
29 DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
17 DS1-5395-000 000 C 1 SPRING NEW
17 DS1-5397-000 000 C 1 SPRING NEW
35 DY1-8120-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E)
35 DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
27 DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y
29 DY1-8211-000 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y
35 DY1-8242-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-511(BROWN) BP-511/512
35 DY1-8243-000 000 C 1 CAR BATTERY CABLE CB-560
35 DY1-8244-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE
37 DY1-8245-000 000 E 1 LAMP, HAROGEN
37 DY1-8246-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, FRONT
37 DY1-8247-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, REAR
21 DY1-8264-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC II DM-MV530i E, 500i E
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
27 DY1-8265-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y DM-MV530i E, 500i E
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
35 DY1-8277-000 000 C 1 MULTIMEDIA CARD MMC-8M
21 DY1-8282-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC II (3CH) DM-MV550i E
27 DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH) DM-MV550i E
35 DY1-8303-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-522(GRAY) BP-508/522/535
*2 13 DY1-8333-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
5 DY1-8401-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT DM-MV550i E NEW
11 DY1-8403-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT DM-MV550i E NEW
13 DY1-8404-000 000 B 1 HINGE ASS’Y NEW
9 DY1-8407-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LEFT DM-MV550i E, 530i E NEW
9 DY1-8408-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, EJECT NEW
21 DY1-8410-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV550i E NEW
5 DY1-8411-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y DM-MV550i E NEW
5 DY1-8412-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, S JACK DM-MV550i E NEW
5 DY1-8413-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y NEW
23 DY1-8416-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y NEW
5 DY1-8418-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT DM-MV530i E, 500i E NEW
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
11 DY1-8420-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT DM-MV530i E NEW
5 DY1-8421-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y DM-MV530i E, 500i E NEW
DM-MV510 E, 500 E, 490 E
5 DY1-8422-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, S JACK DM-MV530i E NEW
11 DY1-8424-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E

5-42
 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
9 DY1-8426-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LEFT DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
5 DY1-8428-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, S JACK DM-MV500i E, 510 E NEW
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
21 DY1-8430-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV510 E, 500 E NEW
DM-MV490 E
21 DY1-8431-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV500i E NEW
21 DY1-8433-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN DM-MV530i E NEW
37 DY4-3338-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, SCART PC-A10
35 DY4-4763-000 000 C 1 CORD, DC
37 DY4-4764-000 000 C 1 CAP, CONVERTER(FRONT)
37 DY4-4765-000 000 C 1 CAP, CONVERTER(REAR)
VD7-2241-001 000 C 3(2) FUSE *()DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
VD7-2241-501 000 C 1 FUSE
VS1-5988-012 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 12P
VS1-5988-028 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 28P NEW
VS1-6448-015 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 15P
VS1-6448-021 000 C 2 CONNECTOR, 21P
VS1-6596-017 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 17P NEW
VS1-6596-033 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 33P
VS1-6719-005 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 5P
WD1-5063-000 000 C 1 FUSE
19 WG2-5194-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW
*1 13 WG2-5210-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y
7 WR1-5083-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER NEW
21 WS1-5705-000 000 C 1 JACK, S VIDEO
WS1-5879-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DV
3 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW
31,33 XA1-7140-147 000 F 5 SCREW
5,9 XA1-7170-207 000 F 2 SCREW
9,13,21 XA1-7170-257 000 F 13 SCREW
3,7,15,19 XA1-7170-307 000 F 25 SCREW
13 XA1-7170-357 000 F 5 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-407 000 F 5 SCREW
11 XA1-7170-657 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
7,15,25 XA4-9170-357 000 F 8(2) SCREW *()DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
3,7,15 XA4-9170-409 000 F 3(4) SCREW *()DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
11,25 XA4-9170-457 000 F 8 SCREW
3,5,7,9,15,17 XA4-9170-459 000 F 22(18) SCREW *()DM-MV500i E, 510 E
DM-MV500 E, 490 E
3 XA4-9170-559 000 F 3 SCREW
25 XA4-9170-607 000 F 3 SCREW
23 XA4-9170-609 000 F 2 SCREW
19 XA9-1166-000 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
21 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW
23 XA9-1294-000 000 F 3 SCREW
23 XA9-1349-000 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
31 XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING
25 YG1-0153-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, PZ
25 YG1-0154-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, AF
25 YG9-5999-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, AF NEW
25 YG9-6000-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, PZ NEW
25 YG9-6001-000 000 C 2 PHOTO, INTERRUPTER NEW
25 YH8-0112-000 000 C 1 IG METER UNIT NEW
19 YN1-1611-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYE PIECE G1 NEW
19 YN1-1612-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYE PIECE G2 NEW

5-43
 CHAPTER 6. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAMERA SECTION-2
SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-1
SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-2
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-3
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-4
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

TEMP SENS 12P LCD UNIT

ZOOM SENS
DMC II ( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS II )

ZOOM MOTOR

SLIDE VIDEO DRUM MAIN LOADING

CHASSIS HEAD MOTOR CHASSIS MOTOR
10P FPC 10P FPC 11P FPC 33P FPC 5P FPC

LCD
FOCUS MOTOR

FOCUS SENS 1 32
2 33

LENS UNIT IG METER

SUB-DMC R-KEY
FPC U
JACK1 P.C.B.
LANC JACK CN1

AV JACK CN2 MAIN P.C.B. 10P FPC 10P FPC 11P FPC 33P FPC 5P FPC
IC104
20 21 CN2000 CN302
1 2 CN301 1 CN304 33 CN303
CN4 21P 21P
CN801 IC803 IC2904 10 1 11 1 2 32 5 1
10 1
2 1 IC802 IC101
27 26 IC2000 IC2903
MIC JACK CN3
CN100
1 2 IC2300
15P CN802 12 12P
IC2301 11
15 14 IC301
IC3501 IC103 IC100
1 IC801 1
5P
JACK2 P.C.B. 2 LI P.C.B.
5
CN102
1 51 CN101
IC3500
1 2
4P
CN701 IC1301
1
BACK LIGHT
4 IC2303 IC4000 IC102
USB JACK CN1602 IC2100 IC1100
CN1301
1
5
5P IC4010 IC4001
CN2100
IC2900 IC1303
CN1604 1 IC1302 1 16
IC1601
RED BLK 2P 1
27
2 IC1101 50 100 CN2900 28
CN405 CAMERA
1
IC1603 DV
TERMINAL
CN3550
IC4002 15 30 SD CARD
IC2101
SPEAKER CN1606 6
12 OFF
28P IC400 IC401
DC JACK CN1605 1 4P
100P
4
EJECT SW 4P
CN406
1 4P VTR IC4201
WP4202 WP4201
4 26 27
IC1605
IC1602
CN400
POWER TRIGGER KEY
2P
1
7P CN901
15 IC1070 CN407 2 1
CN1603 CN1601
2 1 15P 7 5P 1
SW400
1 5 IC3401
CCD P.C.B.
27P
15 1 1 CN902 12
CN1070
LCD P.C.B.
12P
MIC UNIT 15P PHOTO SW
4P IC903
24P
100P 21P 15P
IC902 IC901

IC1206 1 24
CN1000 CN903
5P CN1002 21 CN1201 1
11 1 20 2 15 1
T TAPE/CARD SW
SJ FPC IC1202
11P IC1205

IC1204 IC1001
S TERMINAL IC1201 IC1000 CN1501 CN4101 16
17
17P
1 2
16P
W
CN4102
IC1503 IC1502 IC1501 LCD
1 17 16 Metal contact (Pins' face down) Metal contact (Pins' face up)
CN1502 IC1003 1
ZOOM KEY
1 51 IC1002
1 IC1004
: :
12P CVF P.C.B.
CN1001 PCC P.C.B.
12 IC3200 POWER KEY UNIT
11P
CN3201 CN3200
IC3202
4
4P 1
IC3201
4P 4P Metal contact
4 50 100 1 Metal contact
7P
BATTERY TERMINAL
SHOE CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. PCC P.C.B. PCC P.C.B. CCD P.C.B. CVF P.C.B.
CN100 CN802 CN2900 CN1000 CN1201 CN1070 CN4101
1 PAE/GREEN 1 EJECT SW 1 TDI 1 VSUB 1 DRIVE (+) 1 GND 1 GND
2 GND 2 SP + 2 TRST 2 V2 2 DRIVE (-) 2 CCD OUT 2 COM
3 KEY AD0 3 SP- 3 TMS 3 V1 3 HALL IN (+) 3 GND 3 BL5V
4 PNL OPEN SW 4 GND 4 TCK 4 V3 4 HALL OUT (+) 4 GND 4 G
5 PNL B/T SW 5 VBUS 5 E3V 5 V4 5 HALL IN (-) 5 GND 5 BL5V
6 KEY LED3 6 D- 6 MODE RESET 6 RESET 6 HALL OUT (-) 6 VL (-7.5V) 6 R
7 KEY LED2 7 D+ 7 TDO 7 H1 7 GND 7 VH (+15V) 7 GND
8 KEY LED1 8 GND 8 EEP INI 8 H2 8 FOCUS A 8 H2 8 B
9 POW 5.0 9 CHG LED 9 LANC OUT 9 VH (+15V) 9 FOCUS B 9 H1 9 HCK 1
10 KEY AD1 10 IS 3.0 10 T/C POW SW 10 VL (-7.5V) 10 FOCUS-B 10 RESET 10 HCK 2
11 GND 11 I SW 11 VTR POW SW 11 GND 11 FOCUS-A 11 V4 11 HST
12 KEY AD2 12 Y GYRO 12 CAM POW SW 12 GND 12 FOCUS VCC 12 V3 12 EN
CN101 13 P GYRO 13 DIC XSYSRST 13 GND 13 ZOOM LED 13 V1 13 STB
1 CARD PRO 14 IS GND 14 F MODE4 14 CCD OUT 14 ZOOM SENS 14 V2 14 VCK
2 CARD RSV 15 IS GND 15 GND 15 GND 15 TEMP 15 VSUB 15 VST
3 CARD CMD CN1301 16 ADJ CS CN1001 16 FOCUS LED 16 VDD
4 CARD VSS1 1 GND 17 ADJ REQ 1 GND 17 FOCUS SENS 17 VDD
5 CARD VDD 2 GND 18 ADJ SW 2 GND 18 ZOOM-B CN4102
6 CARD CLK 3 CHR CTL 19 CTOM SCK 3 CHR CTL 19 ZOOM B LCD P.C.B. 1 VDD
7 CARD DET 4 ADV MIC R 20 CTOM DATA 4 ADV MIC R 20 ZOOM-A CN901 2 VSS
8 CARD DAT 5 CHR V 21 XDEBEN 5 CHR V 21 ZOOM A 1 PANEL LCK 3 VST
9 GND 6 ADV MIC L 22 MTOC DATA 6 ADV MIC L CN1501 2 PANEL XOE 4 VCK
10 PBRF 7 AA GND 23 DEBUO 7 AA GND 1 VDD 3 LCD CS 5 STB
11 SWP 8 ADV MIC GND 24 GND 8 ADV MIC GND 2 VST 4 LCD EEP CS 6 EN
12 DIAL CW 9 SHOE ID1 25 DEBDO 9 ID-1 3 VCK 5 SIN1 7 TEST 1
13 DIAL CCW 10 EVF EEP CS 26 V I/O 10 EVF EEP CS 4 STB CN902 8 RGT
14 KEY AD3 11 STSP 27 DEBCLK 11 STSP 5 EN 1 PANEL R 9 HST
15 LI 3V 12 SCLK1 28 GND 12 SCLK1 6 HST 2 PANEL G 10 HCK2
16 DVDD 3.0 13 SHOE ON 29 SWP 13 SHOE ON 7 HCK 2 3 PANEL B 11 HCK1
17 CAM POWER LED 14 SOUT1 30 PBRF 14 SOUT1 8 HCK 1 4 EVF/PANEL GND 12 BLK
18 VTR POWER LED 15 EVF SEN CN3550 15 EVF SEN 9 B 5 C SYNC 13 B
19 CK 3V 16 SIN2 1 XTPB 16 SIN2 10 GND 6 SCLK1 14 R
20 ZOOM AD 17 EVF ON 2 TPB 17 EVF ON 11 R 7 SOUT1 15 G
21 START/STOP SW 18 VF R 3 STPA 18 VF R 12 BL5V 8 POW GND 16 COM
22 TAPE/CARD SW 19 CSYNC 4 TPA 19 CSYNC 13 G 9 LCD UNREG
23 VTR PW SW 20 VF B 5 GND1 20 VF B 14 BL5V 10 LCD 3.0
24 CAM PW SW 21 MIRR 6 GND2 21 MIRR 15 COM 11 LCD 5.0
25 PHOTO SW 22 VF G 22 VF G 16 GND 12 LCD 15/12V LI P.C.B.
26 HALF PHOTO SW 23 EVF BL ON 23 EVF BL ON 17 GND CN903 CN400
27 BATT INFO AD 24 CG FUCHI 24 CG FUCHI CN1502 1 VGL 1 BATT E3
28 BATT E3 25 CG G 25 CG G 1 PANEL R 2 N.C 2 BATT INFO AD
CN102 26 CG R 26 CG R 2 PANEL G 3 STVR 3 HALF PHOTO SW
1 PANEL LCK 27 CG B 27 CG B 3 PANEL B 4 U/D 4 PHOTO SW
2 PANEL XDE 28 GND 28 GND 4 EVF/PANEL GND 5 CKV 5 CAM PW SW
3 LCD CS 29 GND 29 GND 5 C SYNC 6 OEV 6 VTR PW SW
4 LCD EEP CS 30 DSPCLK 30 DSPCLK 6 SCLK1 7 STVL 7 TAPE/CARD SW
5 SIN1 31 27M 31 27M 7 SOUT1 8 VCC 8 START/STOP SW
CN301 32 GND 32 GND 8 POW GND 9 VGH 9 ZOOM AD
1 TR E 33 GND 33 GND 9 LCD UNREG 10 VCOM 10 CK 3V
2 TR LED K 34 D5 34 D5 10 LCD 3.0 11 AVDD 11 VTR POWER LED
3 TR LED A 35 D0 35 D0 11 LCD 5.0 12 STHR 12 CAM POWER LED
4 TR C 36 D6 36 D6 12 LCD 15/12V 13 L/R 13 DVDD 3.0
5 REC PRF 37 D1 37 D1 CN3200 14 N.C 14 LI 3V
6 MIC CIN REC P GND 38 D7 38 D7 1 BATT + 15 VR 15 KEY AD3
7 MIC 3 39 D2 39 D2 2 BATT + 16 VG 16 DIAL CCW
8 C IN 40 D8 40 D8 3 GND 17 VB 17 DIAL CW
9 MIC 2 41 D3 41 D3 4 GND 18 GND 18 PBRF
10 MIC 1 42 D9 42 D9 CN3201 19 CPH3 19 GND
CN302 43 D4 43 D4 1 DC IN 20 CPH2 20 CARD DAT
1 W 44 GND 44 GND 2 DC IN 21 CPH1 21 CARD DET
2 W 45 GND 45 GND 3 GND 22 Q1H 22 CARD CLK
3 COIL COM 46 DBP 46 OBP 4 GND 23 DEH 23 CARD VDD
4 SENS GARD 47 IRIS CL 47 IRIS CL 24 STHL 24 CARD VSS1
5 SENS COM 48 X AGC CS 48 X AGC CS 25 CARD CMD
6 DPG 49 I ENC 49 I ENC 26 CARD RSV
7 DFG 50 XSG 50 XSG 27 CARD PRO
8 V 51 IRIS OP 51 IRIS OP JACK1 P.C.B. CN405
9 V 52 TG SCK 52 TG SCK CN4 1 MMC RSV
10 U 53 LED RET 53 LED RET 1 EXT L 2 MMC CMD
11 U 54 TG SDO 54 TG SDO 2 EXT R 3 MMC VSS1
CN303 55 DA LOAD 55 DA LOAD 3 MIC GND 4 MMC VDD
1 LOAD (+) 56 X TG VEN 56 X TG VEN 4 MIC GND 5 MMC CLK
2 LOAD (-) 57 ZA 57 ZA 5 MIC GND 6 MMC VSS1
3 N.C 58 VGATE 58 VGATE 6 EXT P DET 7 MMC DAT
4 GND 59 ZB 59 ZB 7 AV L/HP L 8 MMC DAT1
5 DEW 60 X TG SEN 60 X TG SEN 8 AV R 9 MMC DAT2
CN304 61 F PBS 61 F PBS 9 GND 10 CARD PRO
1 U- 62 X TG RST 62 X TG RST 10 GND 11 GND
2 U+ 63 FA 63 FA 11 GND 12 CARD DET
3 V- 64 TG GATE 64 TG GATE 12 V I/O/HP R CN406
4 V+ 65 FB 65 FB 13 PLUG IN 1 GND
5 CH+ 66 HD 66 HD 14 GND 2 START/STOP SW
6 N.C GARD 67 Z RST 67 Z RST 15 GND 3 VTR PW SW
7 U 68 VD 68 VD 16 GND 4 CAM PW SW
8 U 69 F RST 69 F RST 17 LANC DC CN407
9 CH- 70 Z PBS 70 Z PBS 18 LANC OUT 1 IS 3.0
10 W - 71 TEMP 71 TEMP 19 4.6 2 ZOOM AD
11 W + 72 GND 72 GND 20 RMC IN 3 GND
12 N.C GARD 73 A/D I 73 A/D I 21 RMC IN 4 PHOTO SW
13 LED A 74 TRI 74 TRI 5 HAFL PHOTO SW
14 LED K 75 DC J DET 75 DC J DET 6 TAPE/XCARD SW
15 MSW VSS 76 A/D V 76 A/D V 7 GND
16 MSW VCC 77 PS 77 PS JACK2 P.C.B.
17 MSW SENS 78 UNREG 78 UNREG CN1601
18 EOT E 79 POW GND 79 POW GND 1 IS GND
19 B&EOT C 80 D VS 80 D VS 2 P GYRO
20 BOT E 81 CAP VS 81 CAP VS 3 Y GYRO
21 CFG VCC 82 DERR 82 DERR 4 I SW
22 CFG1 83 CERR 83 CERR 5 IS 3.0
23 CFG GND 84 GND 84 GND 6 CHG LED
24 CFG2 85 GND 85 GND 7 GND
25 N.C GARD 86 A 3.0 86 A 3.0 8 D+
26 SR E 87 CAM ON 87 CAM ON 9 D-
27 SR C 88 IS 3.0 88 IS 3.0 10 VBUS
28 SR LED A 89 IS GND 89 IS GND 11 GND
29 SR LED K 90 HA 3.0 90 HA 3.0 12 SP -
30 V 91 CAM 3.0 91 CAM 3.0 13 SP +
31 V 92 DVDD 3.0 92 DVDD 3.0 14 EJECT SW
32 W 93 CARD 3.0 93 CARD 3.0 15 EJECT SW
33 W 94 DVDD 1.7 94 DVDD 1.7 CN1603
CN701 95 SDRAM 3.0 95 SDRAM 3.0 1 EJECT SW
1 INT MIC R 96 VTR ON 96 VTR ON 2 GND
2 MIC GND R 97 POW 5.0 97 POW 5.0 CN1604
3 INT MIC L 98 GND 98 GND 1 SP +
4 MIC GND L 99 GND 99 GND 2 SP -
CN801 100 SP GND 100 SP GND CN1605
1 RMC IN CN2000 CN1002 1 GND
2 RMC 5V 1 HA GND 1 SHOE UNREG 2 DC IN
3 LANC OUT 2 H1A 2 SHOE UNREG 3 N.C
4 LANC DC 3 H1B 3 POW GND CN1606
5 GND 4 HA GND 4 POW GND 1 DC IN
6 GND 5 H2A 5 ID-1 2 DC IN
7 GND 6 H2B 6 N.C 3 GND
8 PLUG IN 7 HA GND 7 N.C 4 GND
9 V I/O/HP R 8 H3A 8 ID-2
10 GND 9 H3B 9 ADV MIC GND
11 GND 10 HA GND 10 ADV MIC L
12 GND CN2100 11 ADV MIC R
13 AV R 1 GND
14 AV L/HP L 2 GND
15 EXT P DET 3 Y I/O
16 MIC GND 4 C I/O
17 MIC GND 5 S DET
18 MIC GND
19 EXT R
20 EXT L
21 EXT L

DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E,

DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
CAMERA SECTION-1 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

DATA COMMUNICATION
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL PCC P.C.B. (1/3)
IC1001
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL D9 HD49334FEB
11
CDS/AGC/AD CN1001
D8
30 CDS AGC A/D 10 D0 35 TO
CCD MAIN P.C.B.
OUT
D7
9 IC1004 D1 37
39 CN1301
VH (+15V) D6 PST3627UR D2
8 RESET D3 41
D5 D4 43
Q1071 CAM 3V 7
VOUT 7 BUFFER D5 34
D4
6 4 VDD 2 3.0V D6 36
44 DVDD 4 D3 D7 38
CONTROL 5
D8 40
10 D2
CN1070 CN1000 33 AVDD 2 4 D9 42
V1 4 CCD OUT 2 14 CCD OUT D1 TG SDO TG SDO 54
3
VSUB 15 1 VSUB 18 DVDD 2 TG SCK TG SCK 52
V2 3 D0
V1 13 3 V1 2 X TG VEN 56
IC1070 V3 2 V2 14 2 V2 17 DVDD 1 V GATE 58
SDATA
ICX089AK V4
V3 12 4 V3 47 X TG SEN 60
1
CCD V4 11 5 V4 13 DFDVDD SCK TG GATE 64

SP BLK
SP SIG
48

PBLK
9 7 H1

OBP
H1 13 H1 XSG 50

C/S
ADCLK
H2 8 8 H2 16 AVD 68
H2 14
RESET 10 6 RESET 22 21 19 20 46 AHD 66
RG 12 VH (+15V) 7 9 VH (+15V) 15V DSPCLK 30
VL (-7.5V) 6 10 VL (-7.5V) -7.5V X AGC CS 48
VCC 8
OBP 46
VL 11 6 5 35 CLK 27M 31
IRIS CL 47

XSHD

XSHP

PBLK
VSCK 18
VH (+15V) IRIS OP 51
CCD P.C.B. IS
CONTROL VSI 19 LED RET 53
36 SUB I ENC 49
VEN 20
DA LOAD 55
38 V1 VGAT
21 ZA 57
37 V2 ZB 59
SEN 24
FA 63
40 V3
TIMING RST 25 FB 65
43 V4 CONTROL
GENERATOR Z PSB 70
SSCK 22
F PSB 61
48 H1
SSI 23 F RST 69
1 H2 TG GATE Z RST 67
27
TEMP 71
45 RG XSG
15
AVD
30
AHD
29
15V 39 VH
FCKO
17 1
-7.5V 41 VL 1/2 CKI 4
14 IC1002
NC7SZ00P5X

VDD5 (logic)
VDD6 (logic)
VDD4 (logic)
VCC

VDD3 (SH)
42 VM 11

VDD1 (RG)
VDD2 (H)
NAND 2 5
IC1003
IC1000 CAM 3V NC7SZ08P5X 3.0V
CXD2433R 12 31 2 3 28 44 10 AND
TIMING GENERATOR 5
3.0V CAM 3V 1 3V 3V FROM
27MHz 4 CAM 3V SYSCON-SERVO
3.0V
ZR50,ZR45 MC A, 2 CAM 3V 15V SECTION-1
IC1206 PCC P.C.B.
ZR47 MC KR, -7.5V
DM-MV550i,MV530i E TC7SETOOFU 15V POW 5V
DM-FV30 ONLY NAMD
LED RET -7.5V
CN1201 POW 5V Q1203
TO LENS UNIT 13 ZOOM LED 6 I ENC POW 5V
16 FOCUS LED Q1202 1 5 X IRIS OP
IRIS Q1203
12 ZOOM VCC CAM 3V 4 DRIVER 2
Q1204
2 DRIVE (–) 3 4 IC1204
5 HALL IN(-) 2 1 LMV324MTX IC1201
3 HALL IN(+) OPE AMP M6236870ED
1 DRIVE(+)
POW 5V
2
(1/3) D/A CONVERTER
6 HALL OUT (-)
4 HALL OUT (+) 1
21 ZOOM A 3 11 IE1 LD 2
20 ZOOM-A
19 ZOOM B IC1204 VDD 15 CAM 3V
18 ZOOM-B (3/3) 5 12 IE2
8 FOCUS A IC1205(2/2) 13 7 VCC 16
11 FOCUS-A 10 14 VCC 6
9 FOCUS B 6 8 12 4 13 OFF SET SCK 3 TG SCK
10 FOCUS-B 7 9 CAM 3V
17 FOCUS SENS F RST 5 IC1204(2/3) DI 4 TG SDO
14 ZOOM SENS Z RST 14 DRIVE
15 TEMP TEMP

CAM 3V
ZOOM A
5 OUT3A
IN3 13
ZA IC1205(1/2)
ZOOM-A ZB
19 OUT3B IN4 15 2
FA 1
ZOOM B IN1 9
7 OUT4A VCC 3
IN2 11
FB IC1205 8
ZOOM-B
17 OUT4B F PSB
NJM3414AV
IC1202 EN1 10 OPE AMP
FOCUS A mPD16877MA (1/2)
CAM 3V
2 OUT1A EN2 12
MOTOR DRIVE Z PSB
FOCUS-A EN3 14
23 OUT1B
EN4 16
FOCUS B
4 OUT2A
VM1 1 POW 5V
FOCUS-B
21 OUT2B
VM4 8

CAM 3V 24 VDD VM23 20

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

 CAMERA SECTION-2 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
DATA COMMUNICATION DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL

1 VDD1
MAIN P.C.B. (1/4) DRMX A00 77 DRM A(0) DRM A(0) 21 A0 DQ0 2 CPU D(0)
ZR50 MC A
21 VDD3 ZR45 MC A
13 14 60 15 127 98 61 16 99 62 17 129 65 102 131 21 66 103 132 67 104 23 68 105 24 69 25 26 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 39 40 42 43 45 46 48 49 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 31 20 19 40 VDD4
DRMX A01 78 DRM A(1) DRM A(1) 22 A1 DQ1 3 CPU D(1) ZR47 MC KR
DM-MV550i E

DQ0
DRMX A02 79 DRM A(2) DRM A(2) 23 A2 DQ2 5 CPU D(2)

DQ15

A0

A11
A0

AA

DQ0

DQ15
CN1301 54 VDD5 DM-MV530i E
TO 46 OBP 47 OBP RAS 100 18 CS DRMX A03 80 DRM A(3) DRM A(3) 24 A3 DQ3 6 CPU D(3) DM-FV30
66 VDD6
PCC P.C.B. 48 X AGC CS
CN1001 CAS 63 17 RAS IC1101 DRMX A04 81 DRM A(4) DRM A(4) 27 A4 DQ4 8 CPU D(4) ONLY
35 D0 1 ADIN0 67 VDD7
37 D1 WE 18 16 CAS MB81F161622C DRMX A05 84 DRM A(5) DRM A(5) 28 A5 DQ5 9 CPU D(5)
39 D2
2 ADIN1 SDRAM 82 VDD9
CS 64 15 WE DRMX A06 85 DRM A(6) DRM A(6) 29 A6 DQ6 11 CPU D(6)
41 D3 50 ADIN2 90 VDD10
DQML 130 IC4002

VDDQ

VDDQ

VDDQ

VDDQ
43 D4 14 LDQM DRMX A07 86 DRM A(7) DRM A(7) 30 A7 DQ7 12 CPU D(7)

VDD

VDD
3 ADIN3 98 VDD11

CLK
34 D5 MSM56V16160F
DQMY 20 36 UDQM DRMX A08 87 DRM A(8) DRM A(8) 31 A8 DQ8 39 CPU D(8)
36 D6 121 ADIN4 107 VDD12
35 1 7 13 25 38 44 SDRAM
38 D7 DRMX A09 88 DRM A(9) DRM A(9) 32 A9 DQ9 40 CPU D(9)
90 ADIN5 FMCLK 101 112 VDD13
40 D8 DVDD 3V DVDD 3V DRMX A10 89 DRM A(10) DRM A(10) 20 A10 DQ10 42 CPU D(10)
42 D9 51 ADIN6 JDAG-TDI 48 121 VDD14
FIC FDO
54 TG SDO DRMX A11 92 DRM A(11) DRM A(11) 19 A11 DQ11 43 CPU D(11)
FIC SCK 4 ADIN7 CH1OUT0 136 ADATA0 CARD 3V 130 VDD15
52 TG SCK
5 CAS 95 16 /CAS DQ12 45 CPU D(12)
56 X TG VEN 122 ADIN8 CH1OUT1 32 ADATA1 DVDD 3V 68 VDD8
60 X TG SEN RAS 96 17 /RAS DQ13 46 CPU D(13)
91 ADIN9 CH1OUT2 75 ADATA2 1 131 VDD16
58 V GATE
4 DRWR 101 15 /WE DQ14 48 CPU D(14)
64 TG GATE 140 V GATE CH1OUT3 110 ADATA3 139 VDD17
2
50 XSG IC1102 DRMDQMU 97 36 UDQM DQ15 49 CPU D(15)
30 DSPCLK 27 TGCLK
CH1OUT4 137 ADATA4
S-75V08AMC IC4010 156 VDD18

68 VD CH1OUT5 33 ADATA5
KS4MOU1288MBP 176 VDD19
DRMDQML 100 14 LDQM

66 HD 92 DICHD SIC DRMXCKE 102 34 CKE

VDDQ

VDDQ

VDDQ

VDDQ
CH1OUT6 76 ADATA6 27 TDO

VDD

VDD
51 IRIS OP
53 DICVD DRMXCLK 103 35 CLK
47 IRIS CL CH1OUT7 111 ADATA7 ADATA0 162 CHD A0
44 38 13 7 25 1
53 LED RET IC1100 CXD00 34 CPU D(0)
CH2IN0 107 BDATA0 ADATA1 163 CHD A1
49 I ENC
55 DA LOAD
JS1100071 CH2IN1 72 BDATA1 164 CHD A2
CXD01 35 CPU D(1) CARD 3V
ADATA2
57 ZA
FA
93 SIN-PWH1A DIC2S CXD02 36 CPU D(2)
CH2IN2 29 BDATA2 ADATA3 165 CHD A3
59 ZB FB ZR40 A
8 SIN PWH1B CXD03 37 CPU D(3)
63 FA CH2IN3 135 BDATA3 DM-MV500i E ADATA4 166 CHD A4
ZA CARD 3V
65 FB 124 SIN PWM2A CXD04 38 CPU D(4)
CH2IN4 106 BDATA4 DM-MV510 E ADATA5 167 CHD A5 31 XCE XBYTE 36
70 Z PBS ZB
55 SIN PWM2B DM-MV500 E CXD05 39 CPU D(5)
61 F PBS CH2IN5 73 BDATA5 ADATA6 168 CHD A6 37 XOE DQ0 26 CPU D(0)
69 F RST
DM-MV490 E
CXD06 48 CPU D(6)
67 Z RST
CH2IN6 30 BDATA6 DM-FV200 ADATA7 169 CHD A7 4 XWE DQ1 44 CPU D(1)

31 27M 71 VICCLK CH2IN7 74 BDATA7

ONLY CXD07 49 CPU D(7)
CPU A(1) 25 A0 DQ2 27 CPU D(2)
79 TEMP BDATA0 132 CHD B0 CXD08 50 CPU D(8)
XSYSRST 119 CPU A(2) 19 A1 DQ3 45 CPU D(3)
31 27M
BDATA1 133 CHD B1 CXD09 51 CPU D(9)
91 CAM 3.0 CPU A(3) 13 A2 DQ4 46 CPU D(4)
88 IS 3.0 BDATA2 134 CHD N2 CXD10 52 CPU D(10)
XCE2-2 45 95 DIC2S SX CS CPU A(4) 1 A3 DQ5 28 CPU D(5)
93 CARD 3.0
BDATA3 135 CHD N3 CXD11 53 CPU D(11)
92 DVDD 3.0 IFSEL 86 70 DIC2S SK MODE CPU A(5) 7 A4 DQ6 47 CPU D(6)
94 DVDD 1.7 BDATA4 136 CHD B4 CXD12 62 CPU D(12)
FIOUT 54 87 DIC2S SK FI CPU A(6) 20 A5 DQ7 29 CPU D(7)
BDATA5 137 CHD B5 CXD13 63 CPU D(13)
DIC XRST REQ 40 86 DIC2 SK XSYSRST REQUEST CPU A(7) 14 A6 DQ8 32 CPU D(8)

XCE3 (X PWM CS)

XCE1 (X DIC CS)
DVDD 1.7

XCE2 (X FIC CS)

BDATA6 138 CHD B6 CXD14 64 CPU D(14)
XINTRST 141 69 DIC2 SK XSYSRST CPU A(8) 2 A7 DQ9 38 CPU D(9)

DICFI (FID)
DVDD 3.0 BDATA7 140 CHD B7 CXD15 65 CPU D(15)

SDO PWM
SCK R 118 134 CAM/DIC SCK CPU A(9) 11 A8 DQ10 33 CPU D(10)

SCK DIC
SDI DIC
SCK C
FMCE 74

READ
SDI C

XIRQ
SDO
A9
VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

CARD 3.0 SDI R 143 132 MODE TO CAM/DIC DATA CPU A(10) 5 DQ11 39 CPU D(11)
FMOE 75
RESEVE 1 83 RESERVE 1 RESERVE 1 120 GP1 CPU A(11) 17 A10 DQ12 34 CPU D(12)
IS 3.0 41 134 7 19 59 22 31 138 84 144 37 38 120 46 115 114 83 82 80 39 139 6
FMWE 76
V53 FLASH UPDATE 23 V53 UPDATE V53 UPDATE 124 GP2 CPU A(12) 23 A11 DQ13 41 CPU D(13)
CAM 3.0 IC103 CXA00 28 CPU A(0)
SIC REQ 82 SIC REQ SIC REQ 160 SB REQ CPU A(13) 12 A12 DQ14 35 CPU D(14)
Q105 TMP1942CYU
DVDD 2.2V DVDD 3V CXA01 29 CPU A(1)
SIC PSB 121 SIC PSB SIC PSB 170 PW SAVE CPU A(14) 6 A13 DQ15 42 CPU D(15)
MAIN-MI-COM
CXA02 30 CPU A(2)
SIC BBUSSEL 120 SIC BBUSSEL SIC BBUSSEL 171 BBUSSEL CPU A(15) 18 A14
M TO C DATA
CXA03 31 CPU A(3)
C TO M SCK SIC RESET 119 SIC RESET SIC RESET 172 RESET1 CPU A(16) 24 A15
133 CAM TO MODE DATA
SIC CS 122 SIC CS SIC CS 175 SB SE
CXA04 32 CPU A(4)
CPU A(17) 30 A16 IC4000
Q107 CXA05 33 CPU A(5) MX29LV400BXBI
CPU A(18) 8 A17 FLASH
NTSC XPAL 46
C TO M DATA CXA06 42 CPU A(6)
CPU A(20) 15 A18
SIC MODE DATA 136 SIC TO M 161 SB SD0
CXA07 43 CPU A(7)
MODE SIC DATA 135 M TO SIC 174 SB SDI
CXA08 44 CPU A(8)
DVDD 3V SIC SCK 137 SIC SCK 173 SB SCK
47 MEMORY ACCESS LED CXA09 45 CPU A(9)

CPU A(10)

CPU A(11)

CPU A(12)

CPU A(13)

CPU A(14)

CPU A(15)

CPU A(16)

CPU A(17)

CPU A(18)

CPU A(19)

CPU A(20)
CPU A(9)
CPU A(0)

CPU A(1)

CPU A(2)

CPU A(3)

CPU A(4)

CPU A(5)

CPU A(6)

CPU A(7)

CPU A(8)
MEMORY ACCESS LED CXA10 46 CPU A(10)
48 CHG LED
CTOM DATA CXA11 47 CPU A(11)
33 EJECT SWITCH
CTOM SCK Q108
CXA12 56 CPU A(12)
MTOC DATA 71 MTOC EN

A7 100

A8 101

A9 102

A10 104

A11 105

A12 106

A13 107

A14 109

A15 110

A16 111

A17 112

A18 113
A19 114

A20 117
91

92

93

94

97

98

99
36 XIN CXA13 57 CPU A(13)
84 CAM RXDATA
SO1 98

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6
57 X AGC CS CXA14 58 CPU A(14)
142 CTOM EN
SCK1 99
19 TG GATE CXA15 59 CPU A(15) D0 71 CPU D(0)
SI1 97
88 XSG CXA16 60 CPU A(16) D1 72 CPU D(1)
SO2 1
69 X IRIS OP CXA17 61 CPU A(17) D2 74 CPU D(2)
SI2 100 16 X IN
70 IRIS CL CXA18 72 CPU A(18) D3 75 CPU D(3)
SCK2 2
67 LED RET TO 24 TDI CXA19 73 CPU A(19) D4 76 CPU D(4)
DIC READ 47 AUDIO-VIDEO DICOUT FREEZE
74 I ENC SECTION-2 BCYST 5 61 BCYST D5 77 CPU D(5)
DICOUT PARALLEL 151 CHV A0
X DIC IRQ 87 MAIN P.C.B
61 DA LOAD DICOUT FRAME CPUCKI 6 46 CLKOUT D6 79 CPU D(6)
152 CHV A1
X DIC CS 48 VIC TDO
64 Z PSB DSTB 7 62 XDSTB D7 80 CPU D(7)
NTSC XPAL 153 CHV A2
X FIC CS 49
63 F PSB ADATA0 HLDAK 9 12 HLDAK D8 81 CPU D(8)
154 CHV A3
X PWM CS 50 ADATA1
65 F RES SW MXIO 10 55 M/XIO D9 82 CPU D(9)
ADATA2 155 CHV A4
FID 51
66 Z RES SW ADATA3 RXW 11 56 R/XW D10 83 CPU D(10)
157 CHV A5
MTOC EN 89 ADATA4
79 TEMP UBE 12 64 XUBE IC4001 D11 84 CPU D(11)
ADATA5 158 CHV A6
DIC OUT FRAM 43 UPD70236AGC
ADATA6 JPHACK 13 3 XDMAAKO D12 87 CPU D(12)
58 X TG SEN 159 CHV A7
CAM RX 52 ADATA7 V53
JPHRD 14 58 XIORD D13 88 CPU D(13)
59 X TG VEN BDATA0 141 CHV B0
CAM 3V CTOM EN 53 JACK 2 P.C.B. BDATA1
142 CHV B1
JPHWR 15 57 XIOWR D14 89 CPU D(14)
DIC XRST REQ 40 VCC 1 IS 3.0 BDATA2
8 (1/3) DC 9.5V 4 OUT IC1601 IC1605 BDATA3 143 CHV B2
QINT 20 16 INTP2 D15 90 CPU D(15)
DIC OUT FREEZE 41
DATA IN 3 95 SD0 VC 2 ENC-03JB NJU7096R BDATA4 JPHREQ 115 2 DMARQO
VCC

144 CHV B3 VDD 18

DIC OUT PARALLEL 42 GYRO OPE AMP BDATA5 CARD 3V
DATA OUT 4 94 SI0 RESETO 111 51 XRESET
BDATA6 145 CHV B4 VDD 48
CHARGE
RESET 6 92 X EEP RST LED BDATA7 READY 110 40 XREADY
146 CHV B5 VDD 66
DVDD 3.0 DVDD 3.0
RDY-BUSY 7 91 EEP RB HLDRQ 109 11 HLDRQ
P GYRO 76 CN802 CN1601 5 6 DVDD 1.7 DVDD 1.7 147 CHV B6 VDD 78
IC1303 CS 1 93 X EEP CS CHG LED 9 6 CHG LED 2 CPUMCK 106 49 X1
AK6416AM 148 CHV B7 VDD 86
I ISW 68 I SW 11 4 I SW 3 VCC 8 IS 3.0 1
CLK 2 96 SCK0 CONIRQ 105 17 INTP3
EEPROM P GYRO 13 2 P GYRO IC1603 IS 3.0 3 TO 118 MC DT VDD 96
Y GYR0 77 Y GYRO 12 3 Y GYRO 7 8 VCC AUDIO-VIDEO SIC DAT BS16 104 42 XBS8/BS16
TC7W66FU SECTION-1 VDD 108
IS 3.0 IS 3.0 10 5 IS 3.0 5 SIC CMD 117 MC CMO
SW MAIN P.C.B
TO ZOOM AD 75 ZOOM AD EJECT SW 1 14 EJECT SW 1 2 7 SIC CLK VDD 116
SYSCON–SERVO 15 EJECT SW 6 116 MC CLK 31 N/P
SECTION–2 VDD 6 CAM 3V
MAIN P.C.B.
IS 3.0V
CAM 3V 2 RESET 4 31 X RESET
AVDD 71
EJECT SW
AVREF 73 IS 3V
IC1302 OUT 4 IC1602
IC1301 UPD703017AGC 2 VC ENC-03JA CN1603
PST3627UR CAMERA MI-COM VCC 1 IS 3.0 GYRO EJECT SW 1
RESET

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-1 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL

PCC P.C.B. (2/3) CN1502

LCD UNREG 9
LCD 5.0 11
LCD 3.0 10 TO LCD P.C.B.
CN902

CN1001
DC J DET 75 TO
SHOE ON 13 MAIN P.C.B.
CN1301
IS 3.0 88
IC3200 UNREG 78
28 VCC MB3825APFF CAM 3.0 91
ZR50 MC A LPF CAM ON 87
DM-MV550i E DC/DC CONVERTOR
39 POW 5.0 97
DM-FV30 CONTROL
A 3.0 86
21 LPF
ONLY CH1 Q3208 HA 3.0 88
DSC REGULATOR 6 5 4 DVDD 3.0 92
Q3206
22 1 CARD 3.0 93
TO CN1002 46 LPF SDRAM 3.0 95
ADVANCED
ACCESSORY SHOE 1 SHOE UNREG 1 DVDD 1.7 94
2 SHOE UNREG 2 Q3205 D VS 80
2 3 Q3213 CAP VS 81
Q3214 CERR 83
36 DERR 82
VTR ON 96
LPF A/D I 73
BATTERY FU3201 CH2 Q3212 A/D V 76
REGULATOR 6 5 4
Q3204 LPF TRI 74
DC IN OFF 1
CN3200 FU3200 50 PS 77
BATTERY
TERMINAL 1 BATT + LPF ADV MIC R 4
2 BATT + ADV MIC L 6 ZR50 MC A
3 GND FU3203 LPF ID-1 6 DM-MV550i E
D 4 GND 2 3 DM-FV30
B
LPF CN1002 ONLY
ID-1 5 TO
CN3201 FU3202 LPF
ADV MIC L 10 ADVANCED
1 DC IN
ADV MIC R 11 ACCESSORY SHOE
2 DC IN 3.0V
19
3 GND
4 GND FU3204 CH4 LPF
Q3209
REGULATOR 6 5 4
Refer to 1
SYSCON–SERVO SECTION–2
Q3200, Q3201 57

2
Q3203 1
3 2 3
IC3202
NJM2904V
OPE AMP 33
5 CH3 POW 5.0
D3203
15 2 3 7 29 CAM 3.0
ON/OFF
14 VCC 6 3.0V 3.0V
IC3201 30
LPF 15V
OUTPUT MB3833A T3200
-7.5V TO
DRIVE
CHARGE 4
CAMERA SECTION-1
PCC P.C.B.
CONTROL 5
LPF
3
56
2
POWER D3204
DSC 7
SAVE
1 8
Q3207
12 13 7 8
Q3202
16

Q3210
REGULATOR 6 5 4

CH5 1
DERR
15
64
JACK 2 P.C.B. (2/3)
2 3
CN1606
1 DC IN CN1605
2 DC IN DC IN 2 DC JACK 11
3 GND GND 1
4 GND N.C. 3 Q3211
REGULATOR 6 5 4
CH6 1

CERR
10
4

2 3

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-2 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL MAIN P.C.B.(2/4) IC301 DMC II
LB11990W U
CN302
DRUM
MOTOR DRIVE 59 U 11
MOTOR
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL CN1301
D VS U,V,W,
V
58 IC302 U 10
81 CAP VS 60 S-817A56ANB V 9
DRIVER W
80 D VS 56 V 8
5.6V REGULATOR
DIGITAL 83 CERR COM
23
W 2
82 DERR W 1
PG
(VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL) 87 CAM ON 61 CAM ON VCC2 41 3 OUT IN 2 UNREG COIL COM 3
74 TRI CERR 111 PWM (2) DPG 6 FG
96 TRI DRUM ON POWER TIMING POSITION
77 PS ICO (2) 270 16 SW CONT DETECT DFG 7
153 PWMC
75 DC J DET 125 PS SENS COM 5
AIN3 138
73 A/D I DERR 21 PWM (3)
22 DC J DET DPG DPG
76 A/D V AIN2 210 28 PG AMP 30
296 PWMO
96 VTR ON 6 A/D I CN304
ICO (1) 198 DFG DFG
94 DVDD 1.7V DVDD 1.7V 35 PG AMP 32 U 7
5 A/D V
86 IS 3V IS 3V ICO (0) 27 U 8
CAP VS V REG 31
91 CAM 3V CAM 3V 60 VTR POWER ON 44 V 30
ICS (2) 117
92 DVDD 3V DVDD 3V
U
V 31 CAPSTAN
93 CARD 3V CARD 3V V3TOM FILE TK 30 101 CDATA (5) ROFS 152 DVDD
3V
55 W 32 MOTOR
95 SDRAM 3V SDRAM 3V W 33
V3TOM PC 88 10 CDATA (4) ICLK 26
97 POW 5V POW 5V U+ 2
22 VCC1 V
BACK LIGHT 21 MIRR 99 MIRR MTOV3 PC 89 185 CDATA (3) ICD 116 53 U- 1
(COLOR LIGHT-UP BUTTONS) 15 EVF SEN V+ 4
62 EVF SEN MODE TO VIC3 DATA 129 189 SI (0) TCLK 208 CAP ON
17 EVF ON 2 POWER
SW
V- 3 FG
W
23 EVF BL ON 123 EVF ON VIC3 TO MODE DATA 130 322 SO (0) AIN 1 200 51 W+ 11
ZR50 MC A 10 EVF EEP CS W- 10
DM-MV550i E 124 EVF BL ON VIC3 CLK 131 104 SCLK (0) AIN 0 341
85 A 3V A 3V 50 CH+ 5
DM-FV30 90 HA 3V HA 3V 93 EVF EEPROM CS VIC3 CS 68 283 XEINT0 PWM (7) 265 CH- 9
ONLY 78 UNREG UNREG U.V.W.
DRIVER
49 CFG1 22 S-REEL
VIC3 REQUEST 128 264 SCS (0) PWM (6) 110
12 SSCLK 1 138 SOUT1 CFG2 24
IC103(2/2) CAP FWD FWD/RVS
14 SOUT 1 DFG 231 40 48 DVDD 3V SR LED A 28
TO 139 SIN1 TMPA42CYU SW
PCC P.C.B. 16 SIN 2 CASSETTE IN SWITCH 34 48 AIN 12 SR LED K 29
CN1001 MODE MI-COM DPG 56
26
140 SCLK1 Q2303 47 SR E
MIC1
CASSETTE MEMORY A/D0 13 IC2301(1/3) CFG 67 DVDD 3V SR C 27

TO
CN102
CASSETTE MEMORY A/D1 14
MIC2 MB87M125 RFGT 68
T REEL FG 46 B&EOT C 19
LCD P.C.B. 5 SIN 1
MIC3
VIC3 S REEL FG
EOT E 18
CN901 2 PANEL XOE 59 PANEL XOE CASSETTE MEMORY A/D2 15 RFGS 232 45 BOT E 20
1 PANEL LCK MIC2 POW 5V LED A 13
64 PANEL LCK CASSETTE MEMORY SDA 105
3 LCD CS 64 HALL 42 LED K 14
MIC3
4 LCD EEP CS 63 PANEL ICCS CASSETTE MEMORY SCL 106 POWER MSW VSS 15
43 DVDD 3V
MIC4 16
R-KEY FPC 94 PANEL EEPROM CS CASSETTE MEMORY ON 104
CFG2
MSW AD
MSW VCC
MSW SENS 17
37
POW 5V 1 AVCC 143 CFG
36
KEY LED1 2 CFG1
DVCC3-4 127 38
SW4
KEY LED2 3
VCC POW 5V MODE SW
KEY LED3 4 AMO 118 5
GREEN P UNLOAD
CN100 UNREG POW 5V 3 DVDD 3V DVDD 3V
DVCC51 108
POW 5V 9 1 PAE/GREEN 39 PAE/GREEN SW
KEY LED1 8 3 KEY ADO DVCC52 100
16 KEY AD0 LOD-
KEY LED2 7 4 PNL OPEN SW SWITCH LOAD 61
DAVCC 7 4 DECORDER DRIVER CN303
KEY LED3 6 5 PNL B/T SW 40 PANEL OPEN SWITCH LOD+ LOD (+)
Q102 IC104 63 LOAD (+) 1
PAE/GREEN 1 6 KEY LED3 DVCC3-1 26 LOD (-)
41 PANEL BOTTOM TOP SWITCH Q111 LOAD (-) 2
AD KEY2 12 7 KEY LED2 Q110 Q112 10 DEW
DVCC3-2 56 S REEL FG DEW 5
AD KEY1 10 8 KEY LED1 51 KEY LED3 9
AD KET0 3 10 KEY AD1
50 KEY LED2
AMI (BW1) 57 11 LOADING
SW7 Q306
PNL B/T SW 5 12 KEY AD2 Q100
7 MOTOR
PNL OPEN SW 4 9 POW 5V POW 49 KEY LED1
FVCC 67 IC100 T REEL FG
5V 8
FOCUS DVCC3-3 81 S 8423RFS
17 KEY AD1 6
E3V REG. & RESET
VCC 109
19 KEY AD2 7
CN3 Q101 DEW SENSOR
SW8 PNL BT SW 1 E3DET 107 4 VOLTAGE
DETECT
UNREG 3 BATT A/D
SW1 E 3V
REC SEARCH + 8 3V REG CN301
32 LANC POWER ON TR E 1
MENU E 3V 6 SW 3V REG TR C 4
IC102 RESET BOT DET
Q303
BOT DET
Q303
Q305
DVDD 3V TR LED A 3
SW6 SW2 TL1596CPW Q104 72 LANC CONT TR LED K 2
LITHIUM 3V Q304 Q301 REEL LED CONT
LANC INTERFACE RESET 114 5 REC PRF 5 T-REEL
CARD MIX DF ON/OFF C IN 8
LI3V DETECT 31 2 VOLTAGE MIC3 7
DETECT
ZR50,ZR45 MC A, SW1 PW CONT 4 MIC2 9
ZR47 MC KR XT1(QUARTZ) 115 3 MIC1 10
DM-MV550i, DF
VCC 8 SAFETY
MICON
MV530i E 12 101 LANC OUT
X100
Q302 SW
32KHz
DM-FV30 11 DATA
CONT Q103
ONLY 10 102 LANC IN XT2(QUARTZ) 116
DVDD 3V
CASSETTE IN SW
SW10 LCD PANEL 5.6V 1 VTR CAM POWER LED 45 MIC
OPEN/INVERT REG UNREG
MODE KEY AD3 20
AE SHIFT DETECT SW CARD PRO TO
BATT INFO A/D 4 CARD DET AUDIO-VIDEO
14 LIMITER
DIAL CW SWITCH 42
SECTION-1
LI P.C.B. CN405
SW11 SW5 CN2900 CARD DET 12 MEMORY CARD ZR50,ZR45 MC A,
DIAL CCW SWITCH 43 T/C POW SW 10 CARD PRO 10
ZR47 MC KR POWER & TRIGER
REC SEARCH - PANEL CAM POW SW 12 ADJUSTMENT MMC DAT 7
DM-MV550i,MV530i E
OPEN SW
Q109
85 RMC PULSE IN
START STOP 38
VTR POW SW 11 CONNECTOR 2 4 2 4 MMC CLK 5
DM-FV30 SWITCH UNIT
T/XC PW SW 29 LANC OUT 9 MMC CMD 2
SW9 XRESET 103 XRESET
MMC RSV 1
ONLY
CAM POWER SWITCH 28
TO OSDC CS 58 OSDC CS IC400 IC401
AUDIO-VIDEO VTR POWER SWITCH 27 PB RF FROM POWER
DATA CODE SECTION-2 SOUT 1 AUDIO-VIDEO
SN74AHC1G SN74AHC1G CN406
INVERT
SW
MAIN P.C.B. PHOTO SWITCH 36 SECTION-2 14HDCKR 14HDCKR CAM PW SW 4 VTR OFF CAMERA
IC2900 SCLK 1
CHECK PAD CMOS CMOS VTR PW SW 3
HALF PHOTO SWITCH 37 PB-RF START/STOP SW 2
MMC DET 24
MODE EEPROM CS

CARD PRO 25 CN101 CN400

EEPROM RESET

TRIGER
PB RF 10 18 PB RF
CARD SW ZR50,ZR45 MC A,
LI 3V 15 22 CARD CLK ZR47 MC KR
IS 3V IS 3V 19 21 CARD DET CARD TAPE
DM-MV550i,MV530i E
2 KEY AD3 14 27 CARD PRO DM-FV30
X2

X1

BATT INFO AD 27 20 CARD DAT

4.7V ONLY
3 98 92 110 112 CAM POWER LED 17 25 CARD CMD
CN4 CN801 TAPE/CARD SW 22 26 CARD RSV
RU1 4.7V 19 17 4.7V START/STOP SW 21 5 CAM PW SW PHOTO SW
Q105
RMC IN 20 3 LANC OUT DIAL CCW 13 6 VTR PW SW
RMC IN 21 4 LANC DC IC101 DIAL CW 12 8 START/STOP SW CN407
LANC OUT 18 1 RMC IN AK6440BH VTR PW SW 23 7 TAPE CARD SW TAPE/XCARD SW 6
LANC DC 17 EEPROM X101
20MHz
CAM PW SW
PHOTO SW
24
25
3
4
HALF PHOTO SW
PHOTO SW
HALF PHOTO SW
PHOTO SW
5
4 ZOOM AD
ZOOM & PHOTO
REMOTE CN1
CONTROLER SCLK 1
2 XCK RESET 6
HALF PHOTO SW
CARD DET
26
7
9
10
ZOOM AD
IS 3V
ZOOM AD
IS 3.0
2
1 T W
SWITCH UNIT
CARD PRO 1 2 BATT INFO AD
SOUT 1
3 DI XCS 1 CARD 3V CARD RSV 2 13 DVDD3.0
DVDD 3V DVDD 3V 16 12 CAM POWER LED SW400
SIN 1 DVDD D400 JOG DIAL
4 DO VCC 8 E 3V E 3V 28 17 DIAL CW CCW
3.0V
CARD DAT 8 16 DIAL CCW
AUDIO-VIDEO
CARD CLK 6 15 KEY AD3 CW
JACK1 P.C.B. (1/2) SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B. CARD CMD 3 14 LI 3V Refer to SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-1
CAMERA SECTION-2 ZOOM AD 20 1 E 3V PUSH E 3V
MAIN P.C.B.
B
D
BT403

BT404

LITHIUM
E 3V
BATTERY BATTERY

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

IC2101
MAIN P.C.B. (3/4) 4.7V REG.
NTSC,
iPAL IC2100 CSYNC I
C SYNC SEP 2 V 4.7V 4 5 POW 5V
ONLY LD502U
DATA COMMUNICATION CN2100 48 CLAMP
VIF2 27MHz 4
VCLK0

3 GCA
S TERMINAL Y I/O
Y IN
4 C I/O EQ LPF 36
5 S DET
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL NTSC,iPAL 46 CLAMP Y CONT
SJ FPC 75W 75W 75W CLAMP Y
ONLY Y/C SEP 40
Q2104 Q2103 Q2101 REC C
BPF 21 SIC DAT TO
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL SIC CLK
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
FROM SIC
10 CLAMP C CONT SIC CMD

Y0
27 34
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL ZR50 MC A,
C0
Q2106 30 17 IC3501 ZR45 MC A,
MC74HC4053DTEL ZR47 MC KR,
25 SERIAL DATA VD SWITCH DM-MV550i E,
CARD USB/SIC SIGNAL WIDE WIDE DET CLK DATA CS
15
DETECT
11
DM-MV530i E,
Q2100 VCC
12
DM-FV30
CN1301 4.7V 7 11 20 26 31 32 37 45 47 12 13 14 19 14 CARD DAT
ONLY
TO 4 ADV MIC R 13
10
6 ADV MIC L V 4.7V

LINE IN
PCC P.C.B.
2
CN1001 31 27M
15 CARD CLK TO
AV SCLK SYSCON-SERVO
1
Q2105 AVSO 9 SECTION-2
DVDD 1.7V VIF CS 5
Q701
WIDE CONT 4 CARD CMD
EXT
DETECT 3
15 LCD 3V
CN3

LET CONT
MIC Q2102 CARD BUS SEL.
JACK

CN2
EDATA (0) 20 D0 IC3500

FROM USB
AV EDATA (1) 21 TE4100B
JACK USB CONTROLER
EDATA (2) 22

CN4 CN801 154 CSYNC I EDATA (3) 23

V I/O HP R 12 19 EXT R CDATA (2) 319
8 VCLK 0 EDATA (4) 24
EXT L 1 20 EXT L MMDAT0 13
SCLK (2) 261 AV SCLK
EXT R 2 21 EXT L 248 Y IN EDATA (5) 26
MMCLK 11
AV L/HP L 7 13 AV R SO (2) 321 AV SO
298 CLAMP Y EDATA (6) 27
AVR 8 14 AV L/MP L MMCMD 12
SCS (3) 17 VIF CS
PLUG IN 13 9 V I/O/HP R 364 C IN EDATA (7) 28 TO
EXT P DET 6 8 PLUG IN SCS (1) 100 AIF CS /PONRST 2 XRESET AUDIO-VIDEO
233 VD EDATA (8) 29 SECTION-2
JACK1 P.C.B. (2/2) 15 EXT PDET
250 Y O EDATA (9) 30
MAIN P.C.B.
IC801 A3.7 A4.7 EDATA (0) 205
V4.7 AUDIO 85 C O EDATA (10) 31
INTERFACE 88 VRL 2
34
EDATA (11) 32
AK4561 275
249 VRH 2 EDATA (12) 33
15 14 13 39 41 58 30 28 42 /MMCD 18 CARD DET TO
WIDE DET 123 SYSCON-SERVO
136 AIN 13 EDATA (13) 34 CARD PRO SECTION-2
HP AMP
9 LINE IN 332 SOWP 19
15 SCS (9) EDATA (14) 35
34 AIF CS
WIDE CONT 204
CONTROL 263 SCS (8) EDATA (15) 36 D15
16 GAIN AMP LINE AMP DAC REGISTER 35 AV SO
LET CONT 33
190 SCS (7) XERD 62 /DE
33 AV SCLK DN 8
HP AMP S DET 122
10 323 SCS (10) EADDR (0) 37 A1
DP 7
EXT.MIC DET 32
291 D (5) EADDR (1) 38
12 11 /WE 60
SOUND 203
20 PWM (4) EADDR (2) 39
/CE 63
PLUG IN 121
107 SCS (6) EADDR (3) 40
/IREQ 56
331
AD OFF 31 147 LPS EADDR (4) 43
USB SENSE 3
REC MUTE 31
REC MUTE 32 348 L REO EADDR (5) 44 A6
CR CR AUDIO MUTE 273
NETWORK NETWORK AUDIO MUTE 36 347 D (1)
202

CLOCK EDATA (15) 120

DIVIDER 24 228 AMCK
64 1 2 3 4 6 7 40 XERD 43
54
22 149 WCK EADDR (15) 335
53
AUDIO I/F 23 62 LRCK 126
PRE AMP INV AMP EQ AMP HPF ALC AMP ADC
CONTROL
61 25 148 AUD1 O 277
(L) CN701
26 227 AUD1 I 37
3 INT MIC L 60
MIC 1 INT MIC R 50 49 48 47 46 44 43 38 208
EADDR (0) 25 A0
RESET 10
(R) EADDR (1) 19
127 DO0 26 EDATA (0)
EADDR (2) 13
336 44 EDATA (1)
CR CR
NETWORK NETWORK EADDR (3) 1
Q810 36 27 EDATA (2)
Q811 EADDR (4) 7
209 45 EDATA (3)

Q802
POWER OFF IC2301(2/3) 128
EADDR (5) 20
46 EDATA (4)
MUTE OFF
MB87M125
SPEAKER
JACK2 P.C.B. (3/3) MUTE
Q812
VIC3 39
EADDR (6) 14
28 EDATA (5)
Q806 EADDR (7) 2
337 47 EDATA (6)
CN1604 CN1601 CN802
EADDR (8) 11
1 SP+ SP+ 13 2 SP+ 40 29 EDATA (7)
2 SP– SP– 12 3 SP– Q804 EADDR (9) 49
210 32 EDATA (8)
VBUS 10 5 VBUS Q809
EADDR (10) 17
CN1602 D+ 8 7 D– 129 38 EDATA (9)
1 VBUS D- 9 6 D+ Q808 EADDR (11) 23
4 HP ON EADDR (0) 279 CARD 3V 33 EDATA (10)
3 D+ 5 58 D (6)
EADDR (12) 12
2 D– HP MUTE 39 EDATA (11)
220 D (4)
8 CDATA (1) 11 EADDR (13) 6
Q807 Q3501 34 EDATA (12)
USB JACK XEINT2 214 EADDR (14) 18
41 EDATA (13)
V REF IC802 Q805 Q803 XECS (1) 131 EADDR (15) 24
NJM2770R 35 EDATA (14)

POW 5V 5 V IN V OUT 4 6
4V
Vcc
SP DRIVER XEWRU 44 EADDR (16) 30
DO15 42 EDATA (15)
Q801
EADDR (17) 8
SP STANDBY USB DET. XERD 37 XERD
1 146 D (3) CDATA (0) 186
EADDR (18) 15 A18
IC803 Q3502 IC2300
NJM2870F04 MBM29LV800BA
4V REGULATOR FLASH

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL DIGITAL DV SIGNAL DIGITAL (VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL)

MAIN P.C.B. (4/4)

CN1301
SHOE ID1 9 TO
SDRAM 3V PCC P.C.B.
MDATA (0) 2 78 MDATA (0) SHOE ON 13
AIN 14 339 Q2302 CG FLAME 24
MDATA (1) 4 241 MDATA (1)
1 VCC 1 C LKON 292 VF R 18
MDATA (2) 5 153 MDATA (2) VF B 20
3 VCCQ 1 VF R2 312
VF G 22
MDATA (3) 7 357 MDATA (3)
9 VCCQ 2 VF B2 175 CG G 25
MDATA (4) 8 303 MDATA (4) CG R 26
14 VCC 2 VF G2 91
Q2301 CG B 27
MDATA (5) 10 240 MDATA (5)
27 VCC 3 CSYNC 0 69 CSYNC 19
MDATA (6) 11 162 MDATA (6)
43 VCCQ 3
MDATA (7) 13 76 MDATA (7) TPA 140
49 VCCQ 4 CN3550
MDATA (8) 42 356 MDATA (8) XTPA 220 XTPB 1 DV TERMINAL
TPB 2
MDATA (9) 44 355 MDATA (9) TPB 53
XTPA 3
MDATA (10) 45 151 MDATA (10) XTPB 141 TPA 4
IC2900
MDATA (11) 47 75 MDATA (11) BU2991
MDATA (12) 48 302 MDATA (12)
CHARACTER
GENERATOR
MDATA (13) 50 238 MDATA (13)
CG FLAME 15
VD 233 19 VD
MDATA (14) 51 150 MDATA (14) R
EVF R 16
HD 155 20 HD
MDATA (15) 53 74 MDATA (15) G
EVF G 17
OSD I (0) 234 14 DATA IN
ADDR (0) 23 82 ADDR (0) B
EVF B 18
ADDR (1) 24 167 ADDR (1)
OSD I (1) 70 13 DATA OUT IC2903
DOTCLK 156 8 OSC
2.8V REGLATOR
ADDR (2) 25 244 ADDR (2)
IC2303

RESET

DATA
2.8V 5 VDD

CLK
W986416DH

CS
ADDR (3) 26 306 ADDR (3)
2.8V 4 5 DVDD 3V
SDRAM ADDR (4) 29 81 ADDR (4) 4 3 2 1

ADDR (5) 30 359 ADDR (5)

ADDR (6) 31 243 ADDR (6)

ADDR (7) 32 80 ADDR (7)

OSDC CS
XRESET
ADDR (8) 33 305 ADDR (8)

SCLK 1
SOUT 1
ADDR (9) 34 165 ADDR (9)

ADDR (10) 22 358 ADDR (10) IC2301 (3/3)

ADDR (11) 35 242 ADDR (11) MB87M125 TO SYSCON-SERVO SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B. IC103
VIC3
ADDR (12) 21 164 ADDR (12)

ADDR (13) 20 304 ADDR (13) TO

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
RESET MAIN P.C.B.
DQML 15 360 DQML
IC3500
/WE 16 83 XWE

/CAS 17 159 XCAS

/RAS 18 245 XRAS IC2904

S-80927ANMP DVDD 3V
/CS 19 362 XCS
RESET
CKE 37 307 CKE XRESET 135 1 OUT VDD 2

CLK 38 158 MCLK

DQMU 39 361 DQMU

REC H 53 HA 3V 4.7V

199 ICS (1) 36 5 38

346 D (7) REC CONT REC IC2000

UTIL SWP (5) 252 32 ON
145 CTL (0) LD502W
RDAT 150 35 VRP2 H1A
224 CTL (1) 46 ZR 50 MC A
H1B DM-MV550 iE
6 ADATA (0) 45 DM-FV30 ONLY
TO
CAMERA SECTION–2 DVDD 3.0 DVDD 3.0 315 ADATA (1) H2A
MAIN P.C.B. 43 CN2000
DVDD 1.7 DVDD 1.7
314 ADATA (2) H3A 8
NTSC XPAL XRDAT 294 34 H2B CH-3
42 H3B 9 HEAD
DICOUT FREEZE 179 ADATA (3)
H1A 2 CH-1 CH-2
DICOUT PARALLEL H3A HEAD HEAD
255 ADATA (4) 40 H1B 3
DICOUT FRAME
VIC A 0 95 ADATA (5) H3B
H2A 5 DRUM
VIC A 1
39 H2B 6 UNIT
3 ADATA (6)
VIC A 2 SDL
SDLSEL 350 9
VIC A 3 178 ADATA (7)
VIC A 4 PB ON
100 BDATA (0) PB H 229 1
VIC A 5
VIC A 6 318 BDATA (1)
VIC A 7
183 BDATA (2) 6
VIC B 0
VIC B 1 99 BDATA (3) Q2000
VIC B 2
317 BDATA (4)
VIC B 3
VIC B 4 7 BDATA (5)
D (0) 226 21
VIC B 5
316 BDATA (6)
VIC B 6 GCA
VIC B 7 182 BDATA (7)
PBRF 158 17 EPH GDL EQ VCO

SWP 65 2
UTIL SWP (4)

UTIL SWP (3)

UTIL SWP (1)

UTIL SWP (2)

UTIL SWP (0)

XRCLK

29 30 13 11 12 28 8 25 26 22 23
RAGC
RAPC
RCLK

TO
SYSCON-SERVO PB RF 230 151 176 353 295 93 1 177 313
SECTION–2
GDH CONT
GDL CONT
EQ CONT

GDH CONT

GDL CONT

EQ CONT
XRCLK

RAGC
RAPC

EQFC
RAFC
RCLK

XRCLK
RAGC
EQFC

RAPC

RAFC

RCLK

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-3 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E
DATA COMMUNICATION

LCD P.C.B.
LCD UNREG

CN901
LCK T4201
PANEL LCK 1
OE
IC3401 VTR ON 5
LCD UNREG CPU9D25
PANEL XOE 2
LGS
AH8049FHN
Q4201
LCD CS 3
ECS
DC/DC ON SWITCH
FROM LCD EEP CS 4
SI CONVERTER UNREG 1 CONTROL 4 4 7
MAIN P.C.B. SIN 1 5 CONTROL
CN102 14 6 3
3

VCC

ON/OFF
2
OSC IC4201
1
Q3403 Q3402 R1223W152H
Q3406 OUT1 7.5V DC/DC 3 2 1 5 6
21 10 LCD 7.5V
REGULATOR CONVERTER
Q3407
Q4202 4 5
OUT2 12V/15V DRIVER
19 11 LCD 12V/15V LCD UNREG
REGULATOR
Q3404
OUT3 -10V WP4201
16 13 AL -10V Q4204
REGULATOR

3 BACK LIGHT

WP4202

7.5V

LCD 3V
Q901 Q904
18 25 LCD 5V
20 8

VCC2

VCC3
VDD

Q3
VTR ON 5 Q0 Q1 6 3V ON 5V ON

9 Q4 R OUT Q910
Q2 7 5V ON R
IC902 2 CLAMP 16
14 PNL ON2
BU2092FV GCA
SO Q5 10 15V ON G OUT AL-10V
2 G
DA CONVERTER 48 CLAMP CNTRST GAMMA S/H BRIGHT 14
CLK
3 CLK GCA CN903
LCK B B OUT VGL 1
4 LCK BL ON 1 CLAMP 11
Q6 11 VCC 8
OE GCA
19 OE AVDD 11
43 VDD VR 15
VG 16
44 VCC1 VB 17
E CS L/R
1 CS 3V ON Q906 41 L/R 13
CLK
2 SK IC901 LCD 3V STH2
19
STHR 12
AK6420AM VCC 8 STHL 24
S0 STH1
3 D1 EEPROM LCD 3V 20 CPH3 19
S0 CPH3 CPH2 20
4 D0 22
47 PLL CPH1 21
CPH2
23 STVR 3
CPH1 STVL 7
24
CKV 5
TIMING STV1
CN902 29 OEV 6
GENERATOR
PANEL R 1 STV2 Q1H 22
30 LCD UNIT
PANEL G 2 OEH 23
CPV
PANEL B 3 31 VCOM 10
L CS CS
C SYNC 5 37 OEV VGH 9 LCD
CLK 32
SCLK 1 6 CLK CLK S
SO 38 CONTROL QH
SOUT 1 7 I/F 33
SO D1
LCD UNREG 9 39 DEH LCD 12V/15V
34
LCD 3.0 10 LCD UNREG
LCD 5.0 11 Q2905
FROM
PCC P.C.B. LCD 15/12V 12 LCD 3V IC903 COMDC
8
CN1502 AN2545NFHQ LCD 7.5V
VCOM
LCD 5V LCD DRIVE 9 15V ON

LCD 15/12V Q908

6 5 4 6 5 4 4 Q909 2 1
Q909
3 3
2 1 2 3 5 6
1 Q907

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-4 DM-MV550i E, DM-MV530i E, DM-MV500i E, DM-MV510 E, DM-MV500 E, DM-MV490 E

PCC P.C.B. (3/3)

Q1501

CN1001
MIRR 21 TO
MAIN P.C.B.
11 CG FLAME 24 CN1301
R R
12 CG R 26
G
14 CG G 25
R B
13 Q1506 CG B 27
10 R
G Q1503 VF R 18
2 B
VF B 20
15 G
G VF G 22
1
9 CSYNC 19
B Q1503
5 EVF12V EVF 3V EVF BL ON 23
4 EVF SEN 15
B
3 Q1502 SOUT 1 14
VCC 16 LCD 3V
POW 5V SCLK 1 12
47 18 44 25 EVF EEP CS 10
IC1502 IC1501 SIN 2 16

CSYNC

VCC
VCC2

VCC
MC74HC4053 AN2536FHQ EVF ON 17
Q1505
SWITCH R R/R-Y EVF DRIVER
2
COM
Q1508 REF 42
G G/Y
48 CLAMP CN1502
Q1509 R OUT
16 C SYNC 5 TO
B B/B-Y LCD P.C.B.
1 SOUT 1 7 CN902
Q1507 G OUT SCLK 1 6
CHROMA 14
PANEL R 1
IC1503 LPF PANEL G 2
AK6420AM B OUT
11 PANEL B 3
EEPROM UNREG LCD UNREG 9
CONTRAST
LCD 3V LCD 15/12V 12
DI 3 LCD 15/12V
8 VCC
R
4
OSD R
CVF P.C.B. FN4101
SK 2 G OSD G CG BL 5V 1
5 MIX BRIGHT BACK
LED 2 LIGHT
DO

CS

B OSD B
6 Q4101
EN 34 LED
4 1
BACK GROUND DRIVE
7 HCK1 24 Q4102
LED
SCK HCK2 22 DRIVE
38 CN4101
SDAT TIMING HST 20 CN1501 3 BL 5V
39 LOGIC GENERATOR
BL 5V 14 5 BL 5V CN4102
SEN VCK 31
37 BL 5V 12 4 G G 15
VST 29 G 11 6 R R 14
R 13 8 B B 13
B 9 9 HCK 1 HCK 1 11
HCK 1 5 10 HCK 2 HCK 2 10
HCK 2 8 11 HST HST 9
HST 7 12 EN EN 6
EN 6 14 VCK VCK 4
VCK 3 15 VST VST 3
VST 2 13 STB STB 5
LCD
LCD 15/12V STB 4 16 VDD VDD 1 (CVF)
EVF 12V VDD 1 17 VDD

Q1510
EVF 12V EVF 12V Q1504

ON

EVF 3V LCD 3V
Q1511

01 Mar. 2002 C CANON INC. 2002